Giza & the starry sky
The page is loading…

Research into the Old Kingdom

Giza & the starry sky

From the stars and the Nile to the pyramids of the Giza plateau: fifteen chapters with facts, images, sources and a test of every claim.

c. 2600 BC
Start of construction
4th dynasty
Old Kingdom
146.6 m
Orig. height of Khufu
c. 2.3 million
Blocks in the Great Pyramid
To the table of contents

Table of contents

1Summary The whole research in brief: what is established and what the test yields.4 sect.
2The starry sky: what do we see and how does it work?General astronomy: motion, solstices, precession, visibility, meridian, time and planets.9 sect.
3History of Egypt: climate and the first inhabitantsFrom the ice age to c. 3000 BC: the humid Sahara, the move to the Nile and the beginning of Egypt.4 sect.
4The first dynasties: agriculture, calendar and kingsAgriculture, reading the seasons in the Nile and the stars, the first pharaohs, stone statues and early myths.7 sect.
5Mythology and constellationsThe Sun, Osiris and Isis, the imperishable stars and the gods with a sun disk.7 sect.
6The Giza plateauLocation, builders, buildings and technical data of the plateau.5 sect.
7The pyramidsFacts about the three great pyramids: dimensions, interior, measurements and construction.8 sect.
8What the builders could doThe knowledge and achievements that made the buildings possible: agriculture, writing, mining, transport, organisation, mummification, astronomy and religion.9 sect.
9Method: how do we test “not by chance”?Part 2 begins: five questions, five evidence levels and the calculations.2 sect.
10Numbers in stoneπ and φ, 3-4-5, the size of the Earth and the planets.4 sect.
11Ground plan, sun and horizonOrion ground plan, solar calendar of the Sphinx and causeway, stars before sunrise, the akhet, the two mornings in the Milky Way and the festival calendar.6 sect.
12The shaftsThe four shafts with Petrie’s angles: stars, star clock and gods.5 sect.
13Time, precession and controlPrecession, temple orientations elsewhere, Spence’s north alignment and statistics over 26,000 years.3 sect.
14Myths, stars and buildingsSirius and Orion in the Duat, the morning star, the Sun at the turning points of the year and reasoning backwards.3 sect.
15Balance and timelineAll theories, the conclusion and the timeline.3 sect.
BibliographySources as pdf and online, with clickable referencesappendix
InspirationGraham Hancock and Robert Bauvalafterword
CommentsReaders’ comments and posting a commentreaders

Chapter 1 Summary

The whole book in a few minutes: what is established about Egypt and the pyramids (part 1), which celestial links we test and what remains standing (part 2).

1.1 The research in brief

On the Giza plateau, the kings of the Fourth Dynasty built three great pyramids, the Sphinx and a coherent complex of temples, paved causeways and tombs in the 26th century BC. This research asks how those builders looked at the sky, and whether the sun, the stars and the seasons can be found in the buildings themselves.

The book has two parts. Part 1 (chapters 2 to 8) describes only what has been measured, handed down or is generally accepted. Part 2 (chapters 9 to 15) takes one working hypothesis seriously, the builders did not do this by chance, and tests it as strictly as possible: with stars and margins fixed in advance, our own calculation, the strongest counter-argument and a Stellarium screenshot to check.

1.2 Part 1: what is established

  • The sky (chapter 2). At 30° north the stars turn around a pole that stands 30° above the horizon. Stars around the pole never set; the others are invisible for part of the year. Because of precession the sky shifts slowly: in the time of Khufu Thuban was the pole star, and a fixed angle of slope therefore points at the same star for only a limited time.
  • Nile and calendar (chapters 3 and 4). After the end of the humid Sahara, people moved to the Nile. The year followed the river in three seasons: inundation (Akhet), growth (Peret) and harvest (Shemu). The civil calendar counted 365 days and began with the return of Sirius to the morning sky, shortly before the flood. Without a leap day, that calendar slowly drifted through the solar year.
  • Gods in the sky (chapter 5). In the Pyramid Texts Osiris is Orion and Isis is Sothis (Sirius). Both disappear for a while in the light of the Sun and return; the deceased king goes with them to the south or to the imperishable stars in the north. The Sun dies every evening and is reborn every morning in the horizon, the akhet.
  • The plateau and the pyramids (chapters 6 and 7). Khufu, Khafre and Menkaure built within a century. The Great Pyramid is 146.6 m high, is aligned to the cardinal directions to within 3′ and is the only pyramid with four narrow shafts; Petrie measured their slopes in 1883. The Sphinx faces east.
  • What the builders could do (chapter 8). A food surplus, writing and bookkeeping, quarries and copper mines, transport over the Nile and an organisation that set a block in place every 45 seconds, with a precision of millimetres and arcminutes.

1.3 Part 2: what the test yields

Every claim gets an evidence level from A (measurable fact) to E (speculation) (9.1). All celestial calculations are our own work, with Vondrák’s precession and Petrie’s shaft angles (9.2). The reference year is 2580 BC, in the middle of Khufu’s reign; New Year is the first morning with Sirius, 17 July (Julian), two days after the summer solstice.

  • Strong. The pyramids of the Old Kingdom are aligned to the cardinal directions; later temples are not (13.2). With Petrie’s angles, Orion (King’s Chamber south), Sirius (Queen’s Chamber south) and the pole star Thuban (King’s Chamber north) are within 0.5° of their shaft at the same time only once in the entire precession cycle: 2608–2572 BC, the time of Khufu (12.1, 13.3). In those centuries Sirius returns around the summer solstice, and at the summer solstice the Sun sets in the gap between Khufu and Khafre: the pyramid as akhet (11.3, 11.4).
  • Indication. The slopes yield π and φ and Khafre’s 3-4-5 triangle, but that already follows from the seked (10.1, 10.2). The Earth scale 1 : 43,200 fits to within 0.4–0.7%, with a scale chosen afterwards (10.3). Khafre’s causeway points to the sunrise at the boundaries of the seasons of the civil calendar (11.2).
  • Coherence, not proof. Around 9–11 November 2580 BC every shaft has a star at midnight: Orion, Kochab and Megrez (12.4). Orion and Sirius are 62 and 71.6 days “in the Duat”, in the order of the Pyramid Texts (14.1, 14.1a). At the turning points of the year the Sun stood near Taurus, Leo, the head of Scorpius and Aquarius, the figures of gods with a sun disk (14.2). On 10 May and 8 November the Sun stands in the Milky Way, with figures of life and of death (11.5).
  • Weak or not at all. The ground plan as a copy of Orion’s belt (9.6% deviation, 11.1), Menkaure as Mercury (10.4), the summer solstice as a building orientation of temples (13.2) and knowledge of precession around 10,000 BC (13.1). The descending passage does not point at Thuban in the time of Khufu (13.2b).

The conclusion remains provisional: what is missing is a text or drawing from the Fourth Dynasty that names the sun, stars or measurements as a design rule. All theories with their level are in 15.1, the balance in 15.2 and all moments on the timeline in 15.3.

1.4 Key figures

c. 2600 BC
Construction of Giza (4th dynasty)
3
Great pyramids
365 days
Egyptian civil year
c. 20 years
Construction time of the Great Pyramid
2580 BC
Reference year of the calculations
17 July
New Year: Sirius returns (Julian)
2608–2572
Orion, Sirius and Thuban at the same time (±0.5°)
26
Theories tested (15.1)

Chapter 2 The starry sky: what do we see and how does it work?

Before we look at Egypt, first the sky itself. This chapter describes only what every observer can check: the motions of the sun and the stars, and the fixed rhythms with which they return.

2.1 The rotating sky

The Earth turns on its axis in 23 hours and 56 minutes. As a result, all stars appear to turn around the celestial pole in a day. At the latitude of Giza (c. 30° north) the celestial pole stands about 30° above the northern horizon.

Stars within about 30° of the pole never set. They are visible all year and are called circumpolar. All other stars rise and set, and are invisible for part of the year because the sun is then too close to them.

The Egyptians called the circumpolar stars the imperishable stars; the stars that set they called the unwearying stars. That is how the Pyramid Texts put it Allen 2005, pdf p. 20.

What is visible at 30° north?

  • Pole at about 30° altitude
  • Circumpolar: among others Ursa Major, Ursa Minor and Draco
  • Rising and setting: among others Orion, Sirius and Scorpius
  • The sun follows a fixed path: the ecliptic
Herodotus and the golden ratio
The well-known claim that Herodotus described the golden ratio in the pyramid rests on a misinterpretation. What Herodotus wrote is that the pyramid is square, 800 feet on each side and as high; that is not a geometric rule (Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 4).

Source: Allen 2005, pdf p. 20 · general knowledge

Image not yet saved: run download-afbeeldingen.ps1 (file circumpolar_star_trails.jpg).
Star trails around the celestial pole. Long exposure: the stars turn around the celestial pole in a day. This is the “rotating sky” the Egyptians saw. Source: Wikimedia Commons (licence and author: see file page).

2.2 Solstices and equinoxes

The year in four points. The Earth in its orbit around the sun: two solstices and two equinoxes divide the year into four seasons.

The Earth’s axis is tilted (c. 23.4°) relative to its orbit. As a result, the height of the sun changes over the year. At the solstices the sun is at its highest (summer) or lowest (winter), and at the equinoxes day and night are equally long.

At the latitude of Giza (c. 29.98° N) that gives:

MomentSun at noon (altitude)Sunrise (azimuth)
Summer solstice (c. 21 June)± 83,5°c. 62.7° (northeast)
Equinox (c. 21 March / 23 Sept.)± 60,0°90° (east)
Winter solstice (c. 21 Dec.)± 36,6°c. 117.3° (southeast)

Calculated for an obliquity of 23.44°. In the time of the Old Kingdom the angle was slightly larger (c. 24°), so the extremes differ by a few tenths of a degree.

Source: general knowledge

Solstices in Egypt
The summer solstice roughly coincided with the peak of the Nile flood, and both the summer and the winter solstice were associated with resurrection and rebirth. Researchers point to buildings and tombs that are oriented to the winter solstice. Facts and Details, pdf p. 4.

2.3 Precession of the equinoxes

Precession of the Earth’s axis. The Earth’s axis traces a cone. The pole star (Polaris) is therefore temporary: around 3000 BC Thuban was the pole star, around AD 14,000 it will be Vega.
The path of the pole among the stars. In about 25,800 years the celestial pole traces a circle among the stars. The years are marked along the path.

The Earth’s axis wobbles like a spinning top and traces a full cone in about 25,770 years. That is about 1° per 72 years. This phenomenon is called precession (of the equinoxes).

Consequences:

  • The pole star changes: Thuban (α Draconis) held that role around 3000 BC; now it is Polaris.
  • The vernal point shifts along the zodiac, about 2150 years per sign. Around 2500 BC the sun at the spring equinox stood in Taurus; from c. 1900 BC to c. AD 70 in Aries; after that in Pisces.
  • The stars on a given date therefore change slowly: a star that rose on a certain day in 2500 BC now rises on a different day.

Source: general knowledge

Why this matters
Anyone who wants to compare an ancient building with the sky must therefore always choose the right century. This is done with planetarium software such as Stellarium, which includes precession.

Stellarium screenshot: the pole star in the time of Khufu (A1)

A1Thuban as pole starscreenshot missing
Date
20 October 2580 BC (year −2579); any clear night will do
Time
midnight solar time
View direction
north (0°), field of view c. 40°, equatorial grid on
Expected in the image
  • Thuban (α Dra) 1.2° from the celestial pole: it turns in a small circle between 28.7° and 31.2° altitude
  • Polaris is 25.4° from the pole and is not a pole star
  • Kochab 9.8° from the pole
Test Use the equatorial grid to measure the distance from Thuban to the pole. This shows the reader why Polaris “did not indicate north” in 8.8.
Save file as img/stellarium/A1.jpg
A1 – Thuban as pole star. Use the equatorial grid to measure the distance from Thuban to the pole. This shows the reader why Polaris “did not indicate north” in 8.8.

2.4 Visibility of stars

Whether you can see a star depends on its brightness, its height above the horizon (near the horizon the atmosphere dims the light) and the brightness of the sky. A star that sets or rises with the sun cannot be seen.

The most important observation for calendars is the heliacal rising: the first morning on which a star, after a period of invisibility, can be seen above the horizon again just before sunrise. Sirius, the brightest star in the night sky, is invisible for about 70 days every year because it is too close to the sun; after that it reappears in the east Facts and Details, pdf p. 3.

Because the sun moves about 1° through the zodiac every day, each star rises about 4 minutes earlier each day. So the day of the heliacal rising does not shift from year to year, but it does clearly shift across the seasons. Because of precession that day also shifts very slowly, over centuries.

Concepts

  • Heliacal rising: first visible rising just before the sun
  • Culmination: highest position of the star in the south
  • Azimuth: direction along the horizon (N = 0°, E = 90°)
  • Altitude: angle above the horizon

Source: general knowledge

B2-1Heliacal rising in one sketchimage still to find

What it should show the eastern horizon just before sunrise: the Sun a few degrees below the horizon, the twilight, and a bright star just above the horizon. With an arrow: every day the star rises 4 minutes earlier and so stands a little higher.

Why here the concept keeps coming back (New Year, 70 days of invisibility, the Duat); a sketch shows at a glance why the star is first invisible and then returns.

Search term heliacal rising diagram twilight
Save as img/jpg/b2-1.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.
B2-2Invisible: from last evening to first morningimage still to find

What it should show a year circle or strip with the Sun sliding past a star: visible for the last time in the evening in the west, then invisible for weeks (too close to the Sun), then the first morning in the east.

Why here in chapter 14 that period of invisibility is the Duat of Orion (62 days) and Sirius (73 days).

Search term heliacal setting rising invisibility period sun star
Save as img/jpg/b2-2.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.

2.5 The zodiac

The twelve constellations of the zodiac. In a year the sun passes through twelve constellations along the ecliptic (Aries, Taurus, Gemini, Cancer, Leo, Virgo, Libra, Scorpius, Sagittarius, Capricornus, Aquarius, Pisces).
The zodiac of Dendera. Round relief from the Hathor temple at Dendera, from the late Ptolemaic or early Roman period (1st century BC). It is the best-known Egyptian depiction of the zodiac.

2.6 Meridian and culmination: how high does a star rise?

Every star reaches its highest point once a day. That happens on the meridian, the imaginary line from the south point through the zenith to the north point. That moment is called the culmination or the upper transit.

How high that culmination is depends on only two numbers: the latitude of the observer (Giza: 29.98°) and the declination of the star, its distance from the celestial equator. For a star south of the zenith: altitude = 90° − latitude + declination. In 2580 BC Sirius had a declination of about −21°; so it rose no higher than about 39° above the southern horizon.

For the stars around the north pole it is even simpler. In Giza the celestial pole stands 30° high. A star that is p degrees from the pole circles around it and reaches 30° + p at its upper transit and 30° − p at its lower transit. In the time of Khufu Thuban was only 1.2° from the pole and so swung between 28.7° and 31.2°.

Why this matters: a shaft or passage with a fixed angle of slope points to one altitude above the horizon. Because of precession (2.3) the declination of every star changes slowly; so a star reaches that altitude only for a limited time. That lets you date an angle. That is the tool of chapter 12.

Source: general knowledge

B2-3Meridian and culminationimage still to find

What it should show a cross-section of the sky above Giza: horizon, celestial pole at 30°, the meridian from south to north, a southern star at its highest point and a northern star with upper and lower transit around the pole.

Why here this drawing makes the rule “altitude = 90° − latitude + declination” visible, and also why a shaft can point to a moment in history.

Search term meridian culmination diagram celestial pole altitude latitude
Save as img/jpg/b2-3.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.

2.7 Clock and calendar: sidereal time, solar time and year numbering

Anyone who wants to check the sky of 4600 years ago needs three conventions.

  • Sidereal time. The stars rise about 3 minutes and 56 seconds earlier each day than the day before. After a year that adds up to exactly one day. As a result, the same starry sky appears at an earlier hour on a later date: what is visible on 17 July at 04:05 is in the sky at midnight 61 days later.
  • Solar time. We count hours with a clock; the Egyptians with the Sun and the stars. In this research 12:00 is the moment the Sun is due south (apparent solar time). Moreover, the Earth’s rotation is irregular: over 4600 years this adds up to about 6 hours (ΔT). That is why we always set an image by the altitude of the Sun and not by the clock.
  • Twilight. A bright star is visible when the Sun is about 6° (civil twilight) to 8° below the horizon; a faint star only at 12° to 18°.
  • Year numbering and calendar. Astronomers count a year 0: 1 BC is year 0, so 2580 BC is year −2579. Before 1582 Stellarium uses the Julian calendar. In 2580 BC the summer solstice therefore fell on 15 July Julian (24 June in our Gregorian calendar). In this book every date states which calendar is meant.

Source: general knowledge

B2-4The same sky, a different hourimage still to find

What it should show two small star charts of the same northern sky: one on 17 July at 04:05 and one on 16 September at 00:00, with the same stars in the same place.

Why here the idea that a date and an hour are interchangeable (sidereal time) returns in the star clock of chapter 12; without a drawing it is hard to imagine.

Search term sidereal time diagram same sky different date
Save as img/jpg/b2-4.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.

2.8 Positions along the ecliptic and the Milky Way

Besides altitude and azimuth (2.4) we use two other ways to locate a star.

  • Ecliptic longitude: the position along the path of the Sun, measured from the vernal point (0°). The Sun is at 0° at the spring equinox, at 90° at the summer solstice, at 180° at the autumn equinox and at 270° at the winter solstice. A star at longitude 90° therefore stands where the Sun stands on the longest day.
  • Precession along the ecliptic: the vernal point moves back along the constellations by about 1.4° per century. The star that stood next to the Sun on the longest day in the time of Khufu no longer stands there now.
  • The Milky Way: the glowing band of our own galaxy. Twice a year the Sun stands in it. In Egyptian imagery the sky is the body of the goddess Nut; whether she is also the Milky Way is a modern hypothesis (see 5.2 and 14.1).

With ecliptic longitude we can show in chapter 14 in which constellation the Sun stood at the turning points of the year, and which gods belong there.

Source: general knowledge

B2-5The zodiac as the clock of the yearimage still to find

What it should show a circle with the twelve constellations along the ecliptic and the four turning points of the year (0°, 90°, 180°, 270°), with an arrow showing how precession slowly moves those points backwards.

Why here this shows at a glance why in the time of Khufu the Sun stood on different stars than today.

Search term precession of the equinoxes zodiac wheel ages diagram
Save as img/jpg/b2-5.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.

2.9 The planets and the morning star

Five planets are visible to the naked eye. Two of them, Mercury and Venus, are closer to the Sun than the Earth. They never move far from the Sun and so can only be seen in the evening after sunset or in the morning before sunrise. Venus is then called the evening star or the morning star.

Venus follows a fixed cycle: after 8 years it is back at almost the same place relative to the Sun on almost the same date. In 3 of the 8 years it is in the sky as the morning star on a given summer morning.

In the Pyramid Texts the king appears as the morning star, and the morning star is called the sister of Sothis (14.1). The planets themselves also play a role in the scale comparison of 10.4.

Source: general knowledge

B2-6Venus as morning starimage still to find

What it should show a photo of the morning twilight with Venus as a bright “star” low in the east, preferably with the silhouette of a pyramid or a flat landscape.

Why here the morning star returns in the texts and in chapter 14; a photo makes clear how striking it is.

Search term Venus morning star dawn photo
Save as img/jpg/b2-6.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.

The twelve signs of the zodiac as we know them come from Mesopotamia and were fixed there in the 5th century BC. In the time of the pyramids it did not exist. The Egyptians divided the sky into 36 decans: groups of stars that each rose just before sunrise for 10 days and were used to count the hours of the night (attested from the Middle Kingdom; the oldest star tables are on coffins from the First Intermediate Period) Decan, pdf p. 1. The zodiac of Dendera thus shows how Egyptian and Mesopotamian images of the sky later came together.

Important for this research: the zodiac is a belt around the ecliptic. The Egyptians called that path the Winding Canal Allen 2005, pdf p. 20.

Source: Allen 2005, pdf p. 20 · general knowledge

Chapter 3 History of Egypt: climate and the first inhabitants

Egypt is a gift of the Nile, but the Nile only gained its importance when the climate changed. This chapter follows the path from a green Sahara to a narrow valley.

3.1 The climate after the last ice age

Temperature since 10,000 BC. Global mean temperature relative to 1951–1980. After the end of the last ice age there is a warm plateau (c. 7000–4000 BC), followed by slow cooling.

Around 10,000 BC the last ice age ends. The temperature rises quickly and reaches a warm maximum that lasts more than three thousand years. In North Africa this goes hand in hand with a stronger summer monsoon: the rain moves north.

The graph shows the global temperature. It does not directly say how much rain fell in Egypt, but it does show that the period from c. 8500 to c. 5000 BC was warm and that the cooling afterwards coincides with the end of the humid Sahara.

Source: general knowledge

3.2 The humid Sahara

The Green Sahara. Map of North Africa with the vegetation zones of the humid period: an extensive tree savanna, lakes (including Lake Chad) and rivers where there is now desert.

Between c. 10,000 and c. 5300 BC enough rain fell in the Sahara for savanna, lakes and rivers. This period is called the African Humid Period. Hippos, giraffes and elephants lived there, and rock walls (among others in the Gilf Kebir and the Tassili plateau) show swimmers, herders and cattle.

Hunter-gatherers lived there, and later herders. At Nabta Playa in the Nubian desert, c. 100 km west of the Nile, stone circles already stood by a seasonal lake around 5000 BC.

Source: general knowledge

  1. c. 10,000 – 8500 BC
    End of the ice age. The Green Sahara begins to form.
  2. 8500 – 5300 BC
    African Humid Period: savanna, lakes and cattle in what is now desert.
  3. c. 5300 BC
    The climate dries out quickly. People and cattle move to the Nile valley.
  4. c. 4400 – 3000 BC
    Predynastic cultures (Badari, Naqada) along the Nile.
  5. c. 3100 – 3000 BC
    Unification of Egypt under one king.

The time boundaries are rounded; studies of the end of the humid period give values between c. 5300 and c. 3500 BC, depending on the region.

3.3 The Nile valley as a refuge

Egypt from space. The Nile is a narrow green strip through the desert, with the delta to the north. Giza lies at the apex of the delta.

When the rain stopped, the Nile became the only reliable source of water. The river rises far to the south and its summer water comes from the monsoon rains in the Ethiopian Highlands. Every year the river overflows its banks and leaves a layer of fertile silt.

The Egyptians called the fertile land Kemet, the Black Land, and the desert Deshret, the Red Land. Those who moved to the Nile brought a twofold knowledge: that of the herders (seasons, stars and pastures) and that of the river dwellers.

In these centuries the first villages growing barley and emmer wheat appeared, and the first rules for the use of flood water were laid down. How that worked is described in chapter 4.

Source: general knowledge

3.4 The three seasons of the Nile

Akhet, Peret and Shemu. Inundation (Akhet), growth (Peret) and harvest (Shemu). In this schematic drawing they begin in mid-July, mid-November and mid-March.

The Egyptian year had not four but three seasons of four months each:

  • Akhet, inundation: the land is under water and people travel by boat
  • Peret, growth: the water recedes, the land is ploughed and sown
  • Shemu, harvest: the grain is brought in and stored

The sources give the start date of the season in slightly different ways. That is not an error: the Egyptian calendar had no leap day and therefore drifted through the solar years (see 4.3).

SourceAkhet beginsNote
Nile ScribesLate June (3000–2500 BC)Rising of Sirius, shortly afterwards the flood
Facts and Details21 June – 21 OctoberAccording to Minnesota State University
Ancient Society19 July (Tekh 1)Modern conversion of the civil calendar
Image alongsideMid-JulySchematic drawing

Source: Nile Scribes 2017, pdf p. 3 · Facts and Details, pdf p. 1 · Ancient Society, pdf p. 2

When did the water come? The Nile starts to rise at Aswan at the end of June; at Memphis and Giza the flood arrives in July and reaches its highest level in August and September. That is why the year began in summer: the first sign of the flood coincided with the longest days and with the return of Sirius to the morning sky.

Source: general knowledge

B3-1The Nile level through the yearimage still to find

What it should show a graph or drawing of the water level of the Nile (e.g. at Cairo or on a nilometer) from January to December, with the rise from the end of June and the peak in August–September.

Why here this shows why the summer solstice and the rising of Sirius could serve as announcements of the flood.

Search term Nile flood hydrograph annual water level Cairo nilometer
Save as img/jpg/b3-1.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.

Chapter 4 The first dynasties: agriculture, calendar and kings

This chapter is about what happened when people stayed along the Nile: they learned to read the river and the sky, counted the days, got kings and built in stone.

4.1 The invention of agriculture

Kemet: the Black Land. Impression of farmers working the silt after the flood, with the pyramids of Giza in the background (modern illustration).

Agriculture came to Egypt via the Near East: wheat, barley, sheep and goats are found in the valley and the Fayum from c. 5000 BC. The Nile made the system almost free:

  • The flood leaves silt behind: natural fertilisation.
  • The land is divided into basins with small dykes, in which water is held and then drained.
  • After the water has receded, the land is sown (Peret); in the dry season it is harvested (Shemu). Nile Scribes, pdf p. 5
  • The goddess Renenutet watches over granaries and the harvest. At the beginning of the ninth month, the first of Shemu, a harvest festival was celebrated.

In the flood months farmers could not work. That time was used for state projects: under Khufu, boat crews transported limestone to Giza during Akhet Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 7.

Source: Nile Scribes 2017, pdf p. 5 · Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 7 · general knowledge

4.2 Reading the seasons in the Nile and the stars

How did a village know when the flood would come? The Egyptians combined three observations:

  • The moon: a lunar cycle lasts 29½ days. According to the sources the lunar calendar already existed in the Predynastic period (Nile Scribes, pdf p. 8)
  • The river: the water level was recorded and the flood came at roughly the same moment each time.
  • Sirius (in Egyptian Sopdet, in Greek Sothis): the brightest star disappeared every year for about 70 days and then reappeared just before sunrise. In the period 3000–2500 BC that was at the end of June, shortly before the flood began. (Nile Scribes, pdf p. 4) (Facts and Details, pdf p. 3)

By counting the time between two heliacal risings of Sirius, they found that there were about 365 days in between. That became the basis of their civil calendar. The Egyptians also noticed that the rising of Sirius shifted by about a quarter of a day per year relative to their 365-day year, but the leap day was long in coming.

Sirius just before sunrise. Orion (above) and Sirius (low, left of centre) in the morning sky. This is how Sirius appeared after its period of invisibility.

4.3 The year and the calendar: when does the year begin?

The Egyptians used more than one calendar: a lunar calendar for festivals and a civil calendar for administration and taxes. The civil calendar has:

When does the year begin? New Year was called Wepet Renpet, the “opening of the year”, and fell on the first day of Akhet, the first of the month Tekh (Thoth). It was linked to the heliacal rising of Sirius and the arrival of the flood Ancient Society, pdf p. 16. Around 3000–2500 BC that fell at the end of June (Nile Scribes, pdf p. 4); the modern conversion of the civil calendar gives 19 July (Ancient Society, pdf p. 2).

Because there was no leap day, the calendar drifted by about 1 day every 4 years through the solar year: after about 1460 years (the Sothic cycle) the calendar was back in the same place (Ancient Society, pdf p. 15). The first known leap-day rule is in the Decree of Canopus (238 BC), but it was not applied permanently (Facts and Details, pdf p. 3).

The civil calendar. Overview of year, month, day and hour, and of the seasons Akhet, Peret and Shemu with their months and the conversion to the modern calendar.

The twelve months

SeasonMonth 1Month 2Month 3Month 4
Akhet (inundation)ThothPhaophiAthyrChoiak
Peret (growth)TybiMechirPhamenothPharmuthi
Shemu (harvest)PachonsPayniEpiphiMesore

These are followed by the five epagomenal days, dedicated to the five children of Nut: Osiris, Horus the Elder, Seth, Isis and Nephthys.

Source: Nile Scribes 2017, pdf p. 3 · Nile Scribes 2017, pdf p. 7 · Ancient Society, pdf p. 1

4.4 Seasons: the sky in the light of the calendar

Star ceiling of Senenmut. Ceiling painting from the tomb of Senenmut (18th dynasty) with an astronomical calendar: circles for the months and rows of figures for the decans.

General knowledge about the seasons. The astronomical seasons are defined by the solstices and the equinoxes (chapter 2): in the northern hemisphere spring begins at the spring equinox and summer at the summer solstice. Egypt had a different model, linked to the river, with three seasons of 4 months.

The ceiling from the tomb of Senenmut, the architect of Queen Hatshepsut, shows in a single image how the Egyptians combined sky and calendar. We will need two things from it later:

  • the rows of decans: stars that are each invisible for about 70 days before they rise again just before the Sun. Those 70 days of “staying in the Duat” form the bridge to the myth of Osiris and Sothis (14.1);
  • the northern figures in the middle: the foreleg of the bull (the Great Bear), a hippopotamus goddess and a figure with a spear. These are the imperishable stars around the pole, towards which the northern shafts of the pyramid point (5.6).

The ceiling is much younger than the pyramids (18th dynasty), but the figures and the system of reckoning behind them are older.

Source: general knowledge

4.5 The first pharaohs

Around 3100 BC Upper and Lower Egypt were united under one king. The Naqada III culture in the south spread northwards. The king wore the double crown and was represented as the god Horus.

  • Narmer is depicted on the Narmer Palette (Hierakonpolis) as a victor; in the conventional view he is the first king of the 1st dynasty.
  • Later writers name Menes (in Herodotus: Min) as the first king who united the country and founded Memphis, close to the later Giza (Facts and Details, pdf p. 4)
  • The kings of the 1st dynasty were buried at Abydos. Memphis became the capital of the united country.
  • From the 2nd dynasty onwards the “stretching of the cord” is depicted: together with the goddess Seshat the king lays out the corners of a new building, according to later texts by the stars of the Great Bear. This ritual is the basis of the north alignment of the pyramids (13.2) (Belmonte 2005, pdf p. 1)
  • Djoser (3rd dynasty, c. 2670 BC) and his architect Imhotep had the first large stone pyramid built at Saqqara.
  • Sneferu (4th dynasty) built pyramids at Meidum and Dahshur and was the father of Khufu (Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 1)

Years were counted per king: after his death the count started at year 1 of his successor, for example “regnal year 8, third month of Peret, day 15” (Nile Scribes, pdf p. 3).

Source: general knowledge

  1. c. 3100 BC
    Unification; 1st dynasty (Narmer, Hor-Aha)
  2. c. 2900 – 2700 BC
    2nd dynasty; royal tombs at Abydos and Saqqara
  3. c. 2670 BC
    3rd dynasty: Djoser and the Step Pyramid
  4. c. 2613 BC
    The 4th dynasty begins with Sneferu
  5. c. 2600 BC
    Giza: Khufu, Khafre and Menkaure
B4-1The stretching of the cordimage still to find

What it should show a relief in which the king and the goddess Seshat lay out the corners of a temple with posts and a cord (e.g. from Edfu, Dendera or Abydos).

Why here the ritual links the construction with the northern stars; in 13.2 we show how precisely the pyramids were laid out with it.

Search term stretching of the cord ritual Seshat relief pedj shes
Save as img/jpg/b4-1.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.
Image not yet saved: run download-afbeeldingen.ps1 (file narmer_palette.jpg).
The Narmer Palette. One of the earliest historical depictions of a king uniting all of Egypt (c. 3100 BC). Source: Wikimedia Commons (licence and author: see file page).

4.6 Statues in hard stone: granite and diorite

Already in the Predynastic period Egyptian stonemasons made vessels of hard stone. In the 1st dynasty granite from Aswan was used as a building material for the first time: the floor in the tomb of King Den at Abydos. In Djoser’s tomb the burial chamber was made of granite.

Royal statues were at first made of limestone and slate. In the 4th dynasty statues appear in granite, diorite and greywacke: stone that is much harder than copper. They were worked with dolerite pounders, sand and a lot of time; copper tools were used for softer kinds of stone (Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2).

The best-known example is the statue of Khafre. Auguste Mariette found it in 1858 in Khafre’s valley temple. It is made of diorite (anorthosite gneiss), an exceptionally hard and dark stone that was brought c. 400 miles along the Nile. The valley temple contained 23 statues of the king (Wikipedia: Chefren, pdf p. 3) (pdf p. 4).

Source: Wikipedia: Chefren, pdf p. 3 · Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2 · general knowledge

Why hard stone?

Hard stone was rare, had to come from far away and was difficult to work. A statue made of it meant eternity, power and access to the king’s expeditions. The choice of material is therefore part of the message.

Image not yet saved: run download-afbeeldingen.ps1 (file khafre_statue.jpg).
Statue of Khafre. Seated statue of Khafre in hard stone (Egyptian Museum, Cairo). Source: Wikimedia Commons (licence and author: see file page).

4.7 Early mythology

The earliest gods are local: the falcon Horus of Nekhen, Seth of Naqada, Hathor as a cow, Min of Koptos and Neith of Sais. With unification Horus became the god of kingship: every king was Horus, and after his death he became Osiris.

Around the sun at Heliopolis the Ennead arose, the nine gods: Atum, Shu, Tefnut, Geb, Nut, Osiris, Isis, Seth and Nephthys. According to the myth, Nut, the sky, swallows the Sun every evening and gives birth to it again every morning; her five children are born on the five extra days of the year (4.3). Hathor, the cow, later carries the sun disk between her horns, already in statues from Giza itself (14.2). The Nile itself was worshipped as Hapy, the god of the flood (Nile Scribes, pdf p. 4), and Sirius as Sopdet.

The oldest extensive texts are the Pyramid Texts, from Unas (c. 2350 BC) onwards, but according to the translator the material is clearly older (Allen 2005, pdf p. 15). More about this in chapter 5.

Source: Allen 2005, pdf p. 15 · Nile Scribes 2017, pdf p. 4 · general knowledge

The sign akhet. The hieroglyph akhet: the sun between two hills. It means “horizon” and also the season of inundation.

Chapter 5 Mythology and constellations

The Egyptian sky has three kinds of inhabitants: the Sun that dies and is reborn every day, the stars that disappear and return, and the stars that never set. Whoever knows these three knows the setting of the pyramid. This chapter introduces the gods that belong to them, each next to the celestial body they are.

5.1 The sources

Our most important source for the beliefs of the Old Kingdom are the Pyramid Texts: the oldest preserved literature of Egypt, carved into the chambers of the pyramids. They were first found in the pyramid of Unas and, according to the translator, are clearly older than the first inscription (Allen 2005, pdf p. 15).

Later sources are the netherworld books of the New Kingdom: the Amduat, the Book of Gates and the Book of Caverns. They are a thousand years younger than the pyramids. They show that the image of the nightly journey of the Sun through the Duat, with Osiris at its centre, persisted for centuries; for the Old Kingdom itself we use only the Pyramid Texts.

  • Pyramid Texts: 6 royal pyramids, from Unas to Pepi II and Queen Neith (pdf p. 16)
  • Amduat: known since Queen Hatshepsut, c. 1470 BC, 12 hours of the night (pdf p. 7)
  • Book of Caverns: created in the 13th century BC (pdf p. 1)
  • Book of Gates: twelve gates for the twelve hours of the night (Budge 1905)

Source: Allen 2005, pdf p. 15 · Hornung & Abt 2007, pdf p. 7 · Book of Caverns, pdf p. 1 · Budge 1905, pdf p. 1

Pyramid Texts of Teti. Vertical columns of hieroglyphs in the burial chamber of the pyramid of Teti (6th dynasty, Saqqara).

5.2 The cosmos of the Pyramid Texts

The texts describe the world as a bounded space between land and sky, within the ocean Nu:

  • Geb is the earth, Nut the sky and Shu the air in between (pdf p. 20)
  • Nut is depicted as a woman bending over the earth. In the evening she swallows the Sun, at night she carries it in her body and at dawn she gives birth to it again; Osiris too lives “in the womb of Nut” (pdf p. 20). A series of spells of King Teti is even called “spells for entering the womb of Nut” (pdf p. 67).
  • By day the sun sails across the sky in the day bark and at night in the night bark through the netherworld, the Duat.
  • The second part of the Duat, up to the eastern horizon, is called the Akhet: the “place of becoming effective” (pdf p. 20)
  • The path of the sun through the year is called the Winding Canal, about 12° wide Allen 2005, pdf p. 20
  • The southern sky is the Marsh of Reeds, the northern the Marsh of Rest; in them lie the imperishable and unwearying stars Allen 2005, pdf p. 20

The burial chamber of the pyramid represents the Duat, the antechamber the Akhet (pdf p. 21) (pdf p. 22).

Akhet: the sun between two pyramids. Sunset between two pyramids of Giza. The sun thus seems to form the sign akhet: the sun between two hills.
B5-1Nut above Gebimage still to find

What it should show the classic image of the sky goddess Nut as an arched woman above the reclining earth god Geb, with Shu (the air) lifting her; preferably a version with stars on her body or with the Sun that she swallows and gives birth to.

Why here Nut returns in the pyramid as the “body of Nut” and in the hypothesis about the Milky Way (14.1).

Search term Nut Geb Shu papyrus Greenfield sky goddess
Save as img/jpg/b5-1.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.

5.3 Belief in the afterlife

The Egyptians saw a human being as three parts: the body, the ka (life force) and the ba (personality). After death the ba must unite with the ka. That is how the akh comes into being, an “effective” being that can live forever (Allen 2005, pdf p. 18).

Two forces play a role in this: the sun as the source of all life and Osiris as the force of new life. Osiris is present in the flood water, in the germinating seed and in the daily rebirth of the sun (pdf p. 19).

Every night the sun unites with the body of Osiris in the netherworld and is born again at sunrise. That is the model for the afterlife: a daily journey from death to life.

What happens to the Sun in a single night happens to some stars in a single year. A star that comes too close to the Sun is invisible for weeks and then returns to the morning sky (2.4). The texts say it in their own words: Orion and Sothis are “encircled by the Duat” and emerge again (pdf p. 43). The deceased king goes one of two ways: with Orion and Sothis to the south, or to the stars in the north that never set (pdf p. 20). Those two paths are the subject of the following sections.

Source: Allen 2005, pdf p. 18 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 19

Mummy in a wooden coffin. The body was preserved so that the soul could recognise it after death and use it again.
The opening of the mouth. Wall painting of the ritual by which a mummy or statue could eat, drink and breathe again in the afterlife.

5.4 The Sun that dies and is reborn

For the Egyptians the Sun was not one god but a series of forms, each belonging to a different moment of the day.

Ra and Atum. The sun by day and at sunset.
The sign akhet. The sun between two hills: the horizon.

Ra, Atum and Khepri

the Sun at three moments of the day

By day the sun is called Ra; at sunset Atum, the oldest of all gods; in the morning it is a beetle, Khepri, “he who comes into being” Allen 2005, pdf p. 19. The sign akhet, the sun between two hills, stands for the horizon where that coming into being takes place, and the Great Pyramid was called Akhet-Khufu, “horizon of Khufu”.

Horus. Falcon and king.
B5-2The Sphinx as Hor-em-akhetimage still to find

What it should show the Sphinx from the front, with the Dream Stele of Thutmose IV between its paws, on which the Sphinx is addressed as Hor-em-akhet.

Why here the name links the Sphinx with the rising Sun; we examine that link in 11.2.

Search term Dream Stele Thutmose IV Sphinx Horemakhet
Save as img/jpg/b5-2.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.

Horus of the Akhet

the Sun in the second half of the night and at rising; the king

Horus, the falcon, is the power of kingship: every living king is Horus. In the second half of the night, as the Sun moves towards the eastern horizon, it is called Horus of the Akhet Allen 2005, pdf p. 20. Much later, in the New Kingdom, the Sphinx of Giza was given exactly that name: Hor-em-akhet, “Horus in the horizon”. The Sphinx faces due east, towards the place where the Sun rises at the equinoxes (11.2).

5.5 Stars that disappear and return: Osiris and Isis

Two constellations in the southern sky follow the same rhythm as the Sun, but over a year: they disappear in the light of the Sun and return after a few weeks. They are the stars of the two most important gods of the afterlife.

Osiris. God of new life, king of the Duat.
Orion. The constellation of Osiris; the three stars of the belt in the middle.

Osiris is Orion

Sah, the belt of Orion

Osiris is the god of life that comes into being anew and king of the Duat. In the Pyramid Texts he is Orion: “Look, Osiris is come as Orion” (Pepi I, pdf p. 118). The king rises with Orion in the east and sets in the west, and “the birth of Orion shall not be hindered” (pdf p. 97). Orion is the image of a king who dies and yet returns.

Isis. Sister and wife of Osiris, mother of Horus.
Canis Major with Sirius. Sopdet, the star of Isis.

Isis is Sothis

Sopdet, Sirius, the brightest star

Sirius was called Sopdet (Greek: Sothis) and was identified with Isis (pdf p. 3). Its return to the morning sky after about 70 days announced the flood and the new year (4.2). In the Pyramid Texts Sothis is the king’s sister, and “his sister is Sothis, his brother the morning star” (pdf p. 59). Isis brought the dead Osiris back to life and gave birth to Horus: the star that returns makes new life possible.

Osiris and Isis with Horus. The family that returns in the sky as Orion, Sirius and the rising Sun.

The family in the sky. In summer Orion returns to the morning sky first, Sirius a few weeks later, and then the Sun rises as their child Horus. The order of the myth is the order of the sky.

The texts also name the morning star as the king’s brother or sister, alongside Sothis. That may be the planet Venus, or Sirius itself in its role as morning star (2.9 and 14.1). And in one spell the king is himself “conceived by Sekhmet” and appears “as the morning star, a star with a sharp front” (pdf p. 53). Sekhmet returns in 5.7.

Source: Allen 2005, pdf p. 43 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 53 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 59 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 97 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 118 · Facts and Details, pdf p. 3

5.6 The imperishable stars in the north

The king’s second path leads to the north, to the stars around the celestial pole that never set: the ikhemu-sek, “those who know no weariness” Allen 2005, pdf p. 20. In the time of Khufu there was no bright pole star there as there is now; the celestial pole lay close to the faint star Thuban in Draco. Around the pole turned the Great and the Little Bear.

Great Bear. The foreleg of the bull; also the adze.
The Opening of the Mouth ritual. The priest opens the mouth with an adze.

The Foreleg (Meskhetiu): the Great Bear

the “Striker”, the adze of the Opening of the Mouth ritual

The Great Bear was called Meskhetiu, the foreleg of a bull. In the Pyramid Texts it is also the Striker: the adze with which the priest in the Opening of the Mouth ritual opens the mouth and eyes of the deceased, so that he can speak, eat and see again. Allen: the Egyptians saw Ursa Major as such an adze (pdf p. 453). For the king “the imperishable Striker” is purified (pdf p. 67).

Little Bear. With Kochab, in the time of Khufu one of the brightest stars near the pole.
Draco with Thuban. Thuban was the pole star around 2800 BC.

The hippopotamus and the mooring post: Little Bear and Draco

Reret or Taweret, the protectress around the pole (later sources)

On later star ceilings, such as that of Senenmut (4.4) and the round zodiac of Dendera, a hippopotamus goddess with a crocodile on her back stands in the middle. She holds the foreleg to a mooring post so that it keeps turning around the pole. Which stars she is exactly differs per source: Draco, or the Little Bear with Kochab (Berio 2014, pdf p. 42). Next to her stands a man with a falcon head and a spear. These figures are not yet depicted in the time of the pyramids; the Pyramid Texts only speak of “the imperishable ones” as a group.

B5-3The northern figures of Denderaimage still to find

What it should show a detail of the centre of the round zodiac of Dendera or of a star ceiling (Senenmut, Seti I) with the foreleg of the bull, the hippopotamus with the mooring post and the falcon-headed figure.

Why here these are the figures around the pole towards which the northern shafts point (12.2 and 12.5); a detail makes clear which figure is where.

Search term Dendera zodiac center Meskhetiu hippopotamus Taweret northern constellations
Save as img/jpg/b5-3.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.

Why the north matters. Whoever goes to the imperishable stars never dies again: those stars do not set. Allen thinks that the builders of the first pyramids had this eternal existence in the north in mind (pdf p. 23). The entrance of every pyramid is on the north side, and two of the four shafts of the Great Pyramid point to the north.

Source: Allen 2005, pdf p. 20 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 23 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 67 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 453 · Berio 2014, pdf p. 42

5.7 Bull, Lion and Scorpion: gods with a sun disk

The Egyptians did not divide the year into four seasons but into three (3.4). Yet they paid attention to the turning points of the Sun: the Sphinx faces the equinox point and the summer solstice heralded the new year. Three animal figures of the zodiac have a clear counterpart in the Egyptian world of gods, and two of them carry the sun disk.

Hathor. Cow goddess with the sun disk between her horns.
Taurus. The constellation with the Pleiades and Aldebaran.

The bull and the cow: Apis and Hathor

Bull (Taurus)

The Apis bull of Memphis and the cow goddess Hathor carry the sun disk between their horns. Hathor is depicted like this in the statue groups of King Menkaure, found in his valley temple at Giza. In the Pyramid Texts the king is “the son of Hathor” (pdf p. 68) and “the eye on the brow of Hathor, which turns back the years” (pdf p. 103). A “bull of the sky” also appears in the texts (pdf p. 54); whether that is the constellation Taurus we do not know for certain (Berio 2014, pdf p. 36).

B5-4Sekhmet with sun diskimage still to find

What it should show a statue or relief of Sekhmet as a lioness or a woman with a lioness head, with the sun disk and the uraeus on her head (e.g. the granite Sekhmet statues from Karnak).

Why here Sekhmet is the deity of Leo, where the Sun stood on the longest day in the time of Khufu (14.2).

Search term Sekhmet statue sun disk granite
Save as img/jpg/b5-4.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.
B5-5The constellation Leoimage still to find

What it should show a star chart or classical drawing of Leo with Regulus (“the heart of the lion”) and Denebola.

Why here without this image the second half of the pair of god and constellation is missing.

Search term Leo constellation Regulus chart
Save as img/jpg/b5-5.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.

The lion: Sekhmet, Aker and the Sphinx

Lion (Leo), with Regulus as the “heart”

Sekhmet, the lioness with the sun disk, is the fiery eye of the Sun: dangerous, but also protective (pdf p. 451). In the Pyramid Texts the king is conceived by her as the morning star (pdf p. 53). Two lions, Aker, guard the horizon where the Sun rises and sets; the Sphinx itself is a lion facing east. Later star ceilings show a “divine lion” near our constellation Leo (Berio 2014, pdf p. 5).

Selket. Scorpion goddess, protectress of the dead.
Scorpius. The constellation with Antares and the head with Acrab.

The scorpion: Selket

Scorpion (Scorpius)

Selket is the scorpion goddess. In the Pyramid Texts she is a daughter of Osiris and one of the four goddesses who mourn him, together with Isis, Nephthys and Neith; her epithet is “she who lets throats breathe” (pdf p. 451). She protects the dead. A later title of Osiris is “he who dwells in the house of Selket”, and according to Plutarch the death of Osiris was commemorated “when the Sun passes through the Scorpion” (Berio 2014, pdf p. 25).

Note

The zodiac as we know it is Mesopotamian and was fixed only much later (2.5). That the Egyptians already saw a bull, a lion and a scorpion in the sky in the Old Kingdom is a hypothesis that rests on later sources (Berio 2014, pdf p. 55). The gods themselves and their sun disk are old, though: Hathor with the disk already appears on statues from Giza.

Source: Allen 2005, pdf p. 53 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 54 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 103 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 451 · Berio 2014, pdf p. 5 · Berio 2014, pdf p. 25 · Berio 2014, pdf p. 36 · Berio 2014, pdf p. 55

Chapter 6 The Giza plateau

Three pyramids, a Sphinx and a whole city of tombs, temples and paved causeways, built in less than a hundred years at the edge of the Nile valley.

6.1 The plateau at a glance

The Giza plateau is a limestone plateau on the west bank of the Nile, at the edge of the desert and about 15 km southwest of the centre of present-day Cairo. It belongs to the vast necropolis of Memphis, the capital of the Old Kingdom, and lies exactly on the border between the fertile land and the Libyan desert.

On this plateau stand the three great pyramids of the Fourth Dynasty, surrounded by smaller pyramids, mastabas (rectangular tombs of high officials), temples, raised roads (causeways), boat pits and the Great Sphinx. Together they form one coherent, planned building complex: a necropolis laid out within a few generations. The “Giza complex” comprises three large and six small pyramids (Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 1).

The three pyramids lie on a diagonal line from northeast to southwest and decrease in size: Khufu (Cheops), Khafre and Menkaure. On the east side of each pyramid lay a mortuary temple; from there a causeway ran to a valley temple at the edge of the fertile Nile valley.

Ground plan. The Giza plateau with the three pyramids, the queens’ pyramids, the mastaba fields, the causeways and the Sphinx.

6.2 When and by whom?

Timeline of the Fourth Dynasty

  1. c. 2613 – 2589 BC
    Sneferu builds pyramids at Meidum and Dahshur: the training ground for Giza.
  2. c. 2589 – 2566 BC
    Khufu begins the Great Pyramid. Construction time according to tradition c. 20 years.
  3. c. 2566 – 2558 BC
    Djedefre, son of Khufu, builds at Abu Rawash, just north of Giza.
  4. c. 2558 – 2532 BC
    Khafre builds the second pyramid and (according to the conventional view) gives the Sphinx its face.
  5. c. 2532 – 2503 BC
    Menkaure builds the third, smaller pyramid.

Dates according to the conventional chronology (Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 5).

PyramidPharaohHeight (orig. / now)BaseSlope
Great PyramidKhufu (Cheops)146.6 m / c. 137–138.5 m230.33 – 230.4 m51°50′
Second pyramidKhafre143.5 m / 136.4 m215.25 m53°10′ – 53°13′
Third pyramidMenkaure65.5 – 66.5 m / c. 62 m102.2 × 104.6 m± 51°20′
Different datings
The sources in the folder use different chronologies. Archaeology Magazine (2022) gives Khufu c. 2633–2605, Khafre c. 2597–2573 and Menkaure c. 2572–2551 BC (pdf p. 1). Wikipedia gives Khufu 2589–2566 BC (pdf p. 3) and Bartlett, on the basis of radiocarbon dating, gives construction from c. 2694 BC (pdf p. 3). The difference is a few decades to half a century; this research therefore uses “c. 2600 BC”.
The builders
According to Egyptology, the pyramids were not built by slaves but by paid and well-fed workers: gangs of stonemasons, hauling crews and craftsmen. They were paid in beer, bread and grain (Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 4). Modern research estimates the number of workers at 20,000 – 25,000 Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 4. Their settlement, Heit el-Ghurab (the “Lost City of the Pyramid Builders”), with dozens of bakeries and plenty of animal protein on the menu, lies south of the Sphinx (Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 9). The vizier Hemiunu, a nephew of Khufu, is traditionally regarded as the architect of the Great Pyramid (pdf p. 2).
The papyri of Merer
In 2013 papyri were found at Wadi al-Jarf on the Red Sea: the logbook of the inspector Merer, who transported limestone blocks by boat from the quarry at Tura to Giza. It is the oldest inscribed papyrus found so far and gives a daily account of the building project (Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 5).
Image not yet saved: run download-afbeeldingen.ps1 (file khufu_statuette.jpg).
Ivory statuette of Khufu. The only known statuette of Khufu, c. 7.5 cm high (Egyptian Museum, Cairo): the builder of the Great Pyramid. Source: Wikimedia Commons (licence and author: see file page).

6.3 What was built?

Sphinx and pyramid. The Sphinx guards the east side of the plateau; in the background stands the pyramid of Khafre.
The causeway. The paved road from the pyramid of Khafre to the valley temple by the Sphinx.

The complex in its parts

Three royal pyramids

Khufu, Khafre and Menkaure. The Great Pyramid contains c. 2.3 million stones (on average c. 2.5 tonnes) and was the tallest building in the world until 1311 (pdf p. 2).

Queens’ pyramids

Three small pyramids east of Khufu, intended for his mother Hetepheres I and his principal queens Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 1; three by Menkaure and a cult pyramid by Khafre.

Mortuary temples and valley temples

Each pyramid had a mortuary temple for the offering cult and a valley temple at the edge of the valley. Khafre’s valley temple is one of the best-preserved temples of the Old Kingdom (pdf p. 4).

Causeways

Paved processional roads between mortuary temple and valley temple. Khafre’s causeway is c. 495 m long (pdf p. 3).

The Great Sphinx

A lion with a human head, c. 73 m long and c. 20 m high, carved from a single piece of rock. It lies c. 555 m from the pyramid of Khafre Wikipedia: Chefren, pdf p. 4. It is usually attributed to Khafre; the precise date is disputed by some researchers.

Mastaba fields

Two large fields, the western (G 4000) and the eastern, with tombs of family members and high officials, among them Hemiunu Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 2.

Boat pits

Next to the Great Pyramid a well-preserved solar bark was found. In a pit lay a “royal ship” of 43.3 m, in 1200 pieces; the ship is now in the Grand Egyptian Museum Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 2.

Workers’ town, harbours and canals

The building site had a network of artificial waterways: via the Ro-She Khufu (“entrance to the lake of Khufu”) boats could sail up to the edge of the plateau Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 1.

6.4 Technical details

Great Pyramid (Khufu)

  • Original height: 146.6 m (280 cubits)
  • Base: c. 230.4 m (440 cubits)
  • Slope: 51° 50′ 40″
  • Orientation: c. 3–4′ from the true cardinal directions
  • King’s Chamber shafts: N 31°33′, S 45°14′ (Petrie)
  • Queen’s Chamber shafts: N 37°28′, S 38°28′ (Petrie); more in 7.3

Source: Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 7 · Furlong, pdf p. 2

Khafre, Menkaure, Sphinx & causeways

  • Khafre: c. 143.5 m high, base c. 215 m, slope ≈ 53°10′
  • Menkaure: base ≈ 104 m
  • Khafre’s causeway (to the Sphinx): ≈ 14° south of east (azimuth ≈ 104–105° from north)
  • The Sphinx itself: faces almost exactly east (azimuth ≈ 90°)

Source: Wikipedia: Chefren, pdf p. 1 · Wikipedia: Menkaoera, pdf p. 1

Angles of the causeways. The map shows the angles (104°–105° and 51°52′) relative to north.

6.5 The Nile valley as a building site

B6-1Map of the supply routesimage still to find

What it should show a map of Egypt with Giza, the quarries of Tura (limestone) and Aswan (granite), the Fayum (basalt and gypsum), the harbour of Wadi el-Jarf on the Red Sea and the copper mines in Sinai, with the Nile as the route.

Why here the satellite photo of the Nile is already in 3.3; a map with the routes shows why the building site lay at the edge of the valley and how all materials came by water (8.3 and 8.4).

Search term map ancient Egypt quarries Tura Aswan Giza Wadi el-Jarf Sinai copper
Save as img/jpg/b6-1.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.

The Nile was both a source of life and a highway. Almost all building material was brought by water: limestone from Tura across the river, granite from Aswan, gypsum and basalt from the Fayum and wood from Lebanon (Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2). During the annual flood (Akhet, roughly June to November) ships could sail up to the plateau, while farmers had no work in the fields and were available for the royal building project Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 7.

The pyramids stand on the west bank, on the side of the setting sun and the realm of the dead.

Why here?
The plateau offered a solid limestone base, lay high enough above the flood plain, was close to the capital Memphis and itself supplied part of the building material.

Chapter 7 The pyramids

Only what has been measured and documented. Interpretations about stars and numbers come only in the second part, from chapter 9 onwards.

7.1 From mastaba to true pyramid

The royal tombs of the earliest dynasties were mastabas: rectangular, flat structures above an underground burial chamber. Djoser stacked six of them on top of each other to make the Step Pyramid of Saqqara. In the 4th dynasty Sneferu built three pyramids; the Red Pyramid at Dahshur is the first successful true pyramid. Khufu, his son, built the largest at Giza (Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 9).

A true pyramid has smooth, sloping faces that meet in a single point. The point at the top, the pyramidion or benben stone, was possibly gilded (pdf p. 3).

Source: Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 9 · Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 3 · general knowledge

Image not yet saved: run download-afbeeldingen.ps1 (file djoser_step_pyramid.jpg).
The Step Pyramid of Djoser. Saqqara, c. 2650 BC: the first large stone building, a stack of six mastabas. Source: Wikimedia Commons (licence and author: see file page).
Image not yet saved: run download-afbeeldingen.ps1 (file bent_pyramid.jpg).
The Bent Pyramid of Sneferu. Dahshur, c. 2600 BC: the angle of slope changes halfway from 54° to 43°. The transition to the true pyramid. Source: Wikimedia Commons (licence and author: see file page).

7.2 The Great Pyramid of Khufu

The Great Pyramid. The northeast side of the pyramid of Khufu. The smooth casing of Tura limestone has largely disappeared; the core of local limestone is now visible.
The 25 lengths. All lengths of the pyramid in metres (sides, apothems and height), as calculated from a survey.
FeatureValue
Egyptian nameAkhet Khufu, “Horizon of Khufu” Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 1
Basec. 230.33 – 230.4 m (Lehner 1997: 230.33 m; Dash 2012: 230.329 m) Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 7
Height (original)146.59 m; now c. 137 m Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 1
Slope51°50′40″ Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 7
Number of stonesc. 2.3 million, each on average c. 2500 kg (2.5 – 80 tonnes) Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 3
Volumec. 2.6 million m³ Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 2
Areac. 13 acres (c. 5.3 ha) Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 3
Orientationdeviates 3′6″ from true north Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 3
Difference between sidesat most 4.4 cm Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 3
Jointsc. 1/50 inch (0.5 mm) between the blocks Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 3
Tallest building in the worlduntil Lincoln Cathedral (1311) Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 3

Material and casing

The core is local limestone; the outer layer of polished white Tura limestone made the pyramid shine in the sunlight. It was largely removed in the Middle Ages for other buildings Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 3. The King’s Chamber and the relieving chambers are made of granite from Aswan.

The pyramid from above. Aerial photo taken straight from above. The shadow line across the faces bends slightly: each of the four faces is bent inwards by a fraction along the apothem, so that the pyramid is eight-sided in cross-section. This is general knowledge; the deviation is barely visible to the naked eye on the ground. This returns in 11.4 with the shadow effect at the equinox.

Source: general knowledge

7.3 Interior and cross-section

Cross-section. The cross-section of the pyramid: descending passage, ascending passage, Grand Gallery, King’s Chamber, Queen’s Chamber and the subterranean chamber.
  • The original entrance is on the north side. In the 10th century an Arab treasure hunter broke out a new entrance; around 820 the caliph Al-Ma’mun had a hole made (pdf p. 5)
  • A descending passage of c. 1 m² leads to an unfinished subterranean chamber.
  • The ascending passage was sealed with granite plugs and leads to the Grand Gallery.
  • The King’s Chamber is lined with dark red granite; the sarcophagus (2.27 m long, 1.05 m high) is empty, without lid or remains (pdf p. 6)
  • The Queen’s Chamber was never a burial chamber; the names date from the 18th century and rest on speculation.
  • Above the King’s Chamber lie five relieving chambers with granite beams of c. 40 tonnes. Builders’ graffiti with the name of Khufu are the only authentic proof that he was the builder Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 6
  • In 2017 a large void above the Grand Gallery was discovered using cosmic rays (muons) Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 5

The shafts

Both chambers have shafts in their north and south walls, c. 25 cm wide and high. The Queen’s Chamber shafts end in the middle of the pyramid; robot exploration showed that they end at a door. The King’s Chamber shafts run through the entire pyramid and are therefore called air shafts. No other pyramid has such shafts Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 6.

ShaftPetrie 1883 (average of his measurements)
King’s Chamber, south45°13′40″ (45,23°)
King’s Chamber, north31°33′ (31.55°); per section 32°05′, 31°37′ and 30°43′
Queen’s Chamber, south38°28′ (38,47°)
Queen’s Chamber, north37°28′ (37,47°)

Petrie measured the slopes with a theodolite and a sliding mark over the first few tens of metres of each shaft Petrie 1883, §44 Petrie 1883, §56. He himself notes that the slope changes slightly further out and that the averages over the whole length are probably closer to 31° and 44½°. Later measurements with the robot Upuaut (Gantenbrink, 1993) give somewhat different values (c. 32.5°, 45°, 39.5° and 39.1°). In this book we use Petrie’s measurements: they were made on site and with a consistent method.

The measurements differ from one another; measuring in a narrow space is difficult (Furlong, pdf p. 2). The same goes for the passages themselves: the ascending and descending passages have an angle of 26°33′54″, the diagonal of a 2 by 1 rectangle.

B7-1Cross-section with the four shafts according to Petrieimage still to find

What it should show a cross-section of the Great Pyramid (north left, south right) with the King’s Chamber, the Queen’s Chamber and the four shafts, with Petrie’s angle at each shaft: 45°14′ (King’s Chamber south), 31°33′ (King’s Chamber north), 38°28′ (Queen’s Chamber south) and 37°28′ (Queen’s Chamber north), without star lines.

Why here the old diagram used different angles (45°, 32.5°, 39.5°, 39.5°) and already drew in stars; a neutral drawing with the measured angles belongs in this chapter, the stars come only in chapter 12.

Search term Great Pyramid cross section shafts King's Chamber Queen's Chamber angles
Save as img/jpg/b7-1.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.

7.4 Dimensions: cubit, seked and proportions

The pyramid was measured in the royal cubit: 1 cubit = 7 palms (palm) = 28 fingers (digit), c. 523.5 mm. In cubits the base is 440 cubits and the height 280 cubits (ratio 11 : 7). (Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 7)

The Egyptians did not express a slope in degrees but as a seked: the horizontal distance per cubit of rise. For the Great Pyramid this is 5½ palms (5 palms and 2 fingers), a slope of 14 in 11 and an angle of 51°50′35″ (Furlong, pdf p. 1).

With these two choices (440-cubit base, seked of 5½ palms) the shape of the pyramid is fixed. We keep theories about special numbers in these dimensions for the second part (chapter 10), where we test them.

Worked example

QuantityCalculationValue
Base440 × 0.52355 m230.36 m
Height280 × 0.52355 m146.59 m
Apothem√(280² + 220²) cubits356.1 cubits
Slopeatan(280 / 220)51,84°

Values calculated here for this page.

Image not yet saved: run download-afbeeldingen.ps1 (file royal_cubit_rod.jpg).
Royal cubit (measuring rod). A wooden measuring rod of the royal cubit (c. 52.4 cm), divided into 7 palms and 28 fingers. Source: Wikimedia Commons (licence and author: see file page).

7.5 The pyramid of Khafre

Khafre behind the Sphinx. The pyramid of Khafre, seen over the Sphinx. The top still keeps part of its original limestone casing.
Dimensions of Khafre. Height 143.5 m, base 215.3 m, slope c. 53.1°.
  • Base 215.25 m, original height 143.5 m, now 136.4 m. Slope 53°13′, so steeper than Khufu (pdf p. 1)
  • The pyramid stands on a rock base of c. 10 m and therefore looks taller than that of Khufu.
  • Only on Khafre’s pyramid is the complete pyramid shape still visible: the top third still has its casing (pdf p. 2). The lowest course was pink granite, the rest white Tura limestone.
  • Two entrances (a lower one in the rock, a higher one lined with granite), a central chamber of 14.15 × 5 m with a sarcophagus. Belzoni found the chamber empty in 1818; there is no decoration.
  • Complex: mortuary temple (largest block c. 400 tonnes), causeway of 494.6 m, valley temple with granite pillars and 23 statues, satellite pyramid G2-a (pdf p. 3) (pdf p. 2)

7.6 The pyramid of Menkaure

Menkaure with the causeway. The smallest of the three great pyramids. The entrance is on the north side, at a height of c. 4 m. In the foreground the path of the old causeway.
Dimensions of Menkaure. Height 65.5 m, base 102.2 m, slope c. 51.3°.
  • Original height 65–66.5 m, sides 102.2 × 104.6 m (pdf p. 1)
  • Lower courses cased in red granite; in classical antiquity the pyramid was called the “red pyramid”.
  • Three smaller pyramids (G3a, G3b, G3c) for queens, among them Khamerernebty II. G3a has a base of 44 m and a height of 28.4 m.
  • Colonel Vyse had the burial chamber opened with gunpowder and found a wooden sarcophagus with the name of Menkaure; it sank with the ship Beatrice between Malta and Spain.
  • His mortuary temple is the best preserved on the plateau.

7.7 The three pyramids compared

KhufuKhafreMenkaure
Pharaoh (4th dynasty)Khufu (Cheops)Khafre (Chephren)Menkaure (Mykerinos)
Base230.33 m215.25 m102.2 × 104.6 m
Orig. height146.6 m143.5 m65.5 – 66.5 m
Height nowc. 137 m136.4 mc. 62 m
Slope51°50′53°13′± 51°20′
CasingTura limestoneTura limestone, pink granite belowRed granite and limestone
ChambersThree (incl. Grand Gallery)TwoLarge chamber; passage with three portcullises
Subsidiary pyramids3 queens + cult1 cult pyramid (G2-a)3 queens’ pyramids

Source: Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 1 · Wikipedia: Chefren, pdf p. 1 · Wikipedia: Menkaoera, pdf p. 1

Image not yet saved: run download-afbeeldingen.ps1 (file giza_from_air.jpg).
The three pyramids of Giza from the air. The three great pyramids of Giza: Khufu, Khafre and Menkaure. Source: Wikimedia Commons (licence and author: see file page).

7.8 How were they built?

How the blocks were raised is not known for certain. What is established:

  • According to Herodotus the construction of the Great Pyramid took 20 years; modern research estimates that the number of workers was no more than 20,000 – 25,000 (pdf p. 4)
  • The building material came by boat: limestone from Tura, granite from Aswan, gypsum and basalt from the Fayum and wood from Lebanon Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2
  • Enormous quantities of copper were used for chisels and saws; for every centimetre of sawn stone one to four centimetres of copper is lost Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2
  • The mud-and-sand ramp model is the most common; alternatives are the spiral internal ramp (Houdin) and tilting with lever cradles (Mullers et al., 2022) Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 4

The workers of Merer’s boat crew noted in their logbook that they sailed back and forth between Tura and Giza two or three times in ten days Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2.

Building methods: what is known, what is not?

Most scholars think of ramps of mud and sand, but these would have been many times larger than the pyramid itself. All theories try to answer the same question: how do you put 2.3 million blocks in place in c. 20 years? Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 4

Chapter 8 What the builders could do

A pyramid is not an isolated wonder but the outcome of a society that knew and could do enough. This chapter describes the fields of knowledge and achievements on which the construction rested: agriculture, writing, mining, transport, stoneworking, organisation, medicine, astronomy and religion. Only what follows from the sources or from general knowledge is included.

8.1 Agriculture and food surplus

Agriculture along the Nile. Historical photo of farmers working the land with hoes. Behind the fertile land, at the edge of the desert, lie the pyramids of Giza.

The Egyptian year was determined by the Nile: Akhet (inundation), Peret (growth and sowing) and Shemu (harvest), each four months of 30 days (Facts and Details, pdf p. 1). Whoever knew this cycle knew when the land would be under water, when to sow and when to harvest.

The year began in July with the flood and the rising of the star Sirius just before sunrise. The Egyptians noted that Sirius and the sun coincided at roughly the same moment every year, and therefore counted a year of 365 days Facts and Details, pdf p. 1. That gave them a hold for anticipating the flood and planning the agricultural year.

That agriculture produced more than the farmers themselves needed is evident from the construction itself. The workers were paid in beer, bread and grain (Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 4). Cattle from the Nile Delta were brought to the plateau to feed the workers, and by the palace stood archives, a granary and barracks (Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2). According to modern estimates no more than 20,000 to 25,000 people worked on the Great Pyramid, about 1% of the estimated two million inhabitants of Egypt Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 4.

So one in a hundred inhabitants could be released from producing food for the construction. That is only possible when the other inhabitants produce a food surplus. This is an inference from the numbers mentioned.

Source: Facts and Details, pdf p. 1 · Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 4 · Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2

8.2 Writing and sharing knowledge

A project of this size requires recorded agreements, numbers and instructions. The Egyptians used two forms of writing for this: hieroglyphs in stone for texts that had to last, and ink on papyrus for daily administration.

Near the Red Sea a French-Egyptian expedition found the oldest inscribed papyri found so far. One of them bears one of the royal names of Khufu (Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 6). They include accounting documents and the logbooks of the inspector Merer, who led a crew of c. 40 men and noted daily where he sailed, what he transported and where he slept Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 6 (pdf p. 7). Such a group (phyle) was one of the four units of a larger gang with its own name, such as “The escort team of ‘The Uraeus of Khufu is its prow’” Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 6.

There is also writing on the building site itself: in the relieving chambers above the King’s Chamber there are builders’ graffiti of the workers with the name of Khufu (Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 6). Years were counted by the king’s regnal year (Nile Scribes, pdf p. 3).

For knowledge that must not be lost, stone was chosen. The Pyramid Texts are the oldest preserved religious writings of Egypt and at the same time the oldest literature of the country (Allen 2005, pdf p. 12). They were carved into the burial chambers of Old Kingdom kings, in vertical columns of hieroglyphs. Each spell is usually preceded by a sign for “Recitation” (pdf p. 14): the text was meant to be spoken.

Source: Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 6 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 12 · Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 6 · general knowledge

Pyramid Texts of Teti. Vertical columns of hieroglyphs in the burial chamber of the pyramid of Teti (6th dynasty, Saqqara). One of the oldest preserved texts of Egypt.

8.3 Mining and quarries

The Egyptians obtained raw materials from all over Egypt and beyond. For the construction of Khufu’s complex the materials came from the regions below.

MaterialOriginUse
Limestone (core)Local, on the plateau itselfCore of the pyramid (Cheops p. 3)
White Tura limestoneQuarries of Tura, east bank of the NilePolished casing (Archaeology p. 1)
GraniteAswan, in the southBeams of c. 40 tonnes above the King’s Chamber; lining of the King’s Chamber (Cheops p. 6) (Archaeology p. 2)
Gypsum and basaltThe FayumAmong other things basalt paving by the pyramid Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2
WoodLebanonBrought by boat for the completion of the complex Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2
CopperSinai (large mines) and the Eastern DesertTools: picks, saws and chisels Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2 (p. 3)

Copper was indispensable. With copper picks the stone was quarried, with copper saws it was sawn and with copper chisels about a finger wide it was smoothed. Experiments have shown that for every one to four inches of sawn stone, one inch of metal was lost from the saw blade (Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2). The enormous quantity of copper led to a search for new sources.

Source: Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2 · Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 3 · Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 3 · Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 6

A harbour for copper mining

The largest copper sources lay across the sea, in the south of the Sinai peninsula. The harbour of Wadi el-Jarf on the Red Sea was used in the 4th dynasty, for about 50 to 70 years, including under Khufu. It is the oldest known harbour in the world (Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 3).

Hundreds of workers were employed there, divided into groups to keep the mining operation running smoothly. Storage galleries were cut into the rock, and the sailing season on the Red Sea ran from spring to the end of summer Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 3 (pdf p. 8).

Image not yet saved: run download-afbeeldingen.ps1 (file aswan_unfinished_obelisk.jpg).
The unfinished obelisk of Aswan. Granite was cut out in the quarry with dolerite balls; the obelisk broke and was left in the rock. Source: Wikimedia Commons (licence and author: see file page).

8.4 Transport by water

The Nile was the highway of the kingdom. Almost all building material came to the plateau by water: limestone from Tura, granite from Aswan, gypsum and basalt from the Fayum and wood from Lebanon (Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2). Workers from all over the country and cattle from the Delta also came by boat.

To let ships sail up to the edge of the plateau, a network of artificial waterways and canals was dug, with an entrance gate to the lake of Khufu, the Ro-She Khufu. By the lake lay the harbour, the valley temple, a palace, archives, a granary and workers’ barracks (pdf p. 1) Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2.

Merer’s logbooks show how this worked. His crew of c. 40 men loaded limestone blocks at Tura, slept at the lake of Khufu and sailed on the next day to Akhet Khufu, the pyramid. In ten days they made two or three such round trips Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2 (pdf p. 7). The transport time depended on the seasons: in the flood season (c. June to November) heavy loads could be moved; after the water had receded the crew went to the Delta or to the Red Sea Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 7 Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 8.

Ships were also part of the burial. Next to the pyramid of Khufu a very well-preserved boat was found, and five rock pits around the pyramid contained ships. The tradition of giving kings ships already existed in the 1st and 2nd dynasties (Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 2).

Source: Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2 · Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 7 · Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 2

B8-1The lake of Khufu and the harboursimage still to find

What it should show a reconstruction drawing or map of the harbour at Giza: the canal from the Nile, the “lake of Khufu” (Ro-She Khufu), the valley temple and the workers’ town Heit el-Ghurab.

Why here the satellite photo of the Nile is already in 3.3; a map of the harbour shows how Merer’s logbooks (Tura – lake of Khufu – Akhet-Khufu) worked.

Search term Giza harbor reconstruction Khufu lake Heit el-Ghurab AERA map
Save as img/jpg/b8-1.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.
Relief of a cargo ship. Relief of a ship with cargo; transporting stone over the Nile was the main transport route to Giza.

8.5 Building and working hard stone

The Great Pyramid is a work of precision. A base of 13 acres (c. 5.3 ha) is laid out so flat and square that the sides hardly differ (Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 3). The dimensions are not accidental: the design is built up from royal cubits and the seked, a fixed ratio for the slope (see 7.4).

Construction took about 20 years (Cheops p. 4) and required a steady building rate of on average one block of average size every 2 to 3 minutes in a working day of 10 hours Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 3.

Source: Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 3 · Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 2 · Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 4

Cross-section of the Great Pyramid. Passages, the Grand Gallery and the chambers are built into a massive block and precisely matched to one another.

Hard stone

How hard stone was worked is described in 4.6. In the Great Pyramid itself: granite from Aswan for the beams of c. 40 tonnes above the King’s Chamber and the king’s sarcophagus (Cheops p. 6).

Statues were also made of hard stone. The statue of Khafre is made of diorite, which had to be brought from far away over the Nile (Chefren p. 3). It was worked with dolerite pounders, sand and a lot of time Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2 (see also 4.6).

8.6 Organisation and speed

Quarrying, transporting and placing material without the work coming to a halt requires organisation. The pace of construction and the structure of the work gangs make clear that there was an administrative apparatus with planning, bookkeeping and supervision.

AspectWhat we knowSource
Total workersno more than 20,000 – 25,000, c. 1% of the population(Cheops p. 4)
Paymentbeer, bread and grain; not slaves but paid workersWikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 4
Rolesstonemasons, pioneers, haulers, masons, plasterers, suppliers, servants, engineers and architectsWikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 4
Organisationgroups (phyles) of c. 40 men under an inspector, four groups per larger gang with its own name(Archaeology p. 6)
Seasonal worktransport in the flood season; then the Delta and the Red Sea; probably a break from January to March(Archaeology p. 8)
Leadershipa vizier and overseer of works (Hemiunu, grandson of Sneferu)(Cheops p. 2)
Construction timec. 20 years for the pyramid itselfWikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 4
Paceon average one block every 2 to 3 minutes in 10 hours(Bartlett p. 3)

The numbers are estimates. Both Bartlett Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 3 and Wikipedia Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 4 assume a construction time of c. 20 years; we leave the exact years aside here.

And all that with this precision

The pace alone is impressive. But each of those blocks also had to end up in the right place, within tolerances that we can only measure properly with modern instruments.

WhatDeviationWhat that means
Direction of the sides relative to true north3′6″ (0,05°) (Bartlett, pdf p. 3)over the full 230 m side the end deviates c. 20 cm: less than the width of one block
Length of the four sidesat most 4.4 cm difference over c. 230 m (Bartlett, pdf p. 3)0.02%: an error of 2 mm per 10 m
Flatness of the basec. 2 cm difference in height across the whole base (Lehner 1997)over 5.3 ha; level without a spirit level as we know it
Joints between the casing stonesc. 0.5 mm, filled with mortar (Bartlett, pdf p. 3)blocks weighing tonnes fitted so tightly that a knife cannot pass between them
Angle of slope of the faces51°50′40″, a seked of 5½ palms (7.4)146 m high and all four edges meet in a single point

Lehner: general knowledge from The Complete Pyramids (1997); the other values from Bartlett (2014).

Put that next to the pace of one block every 45 seconds (in the building season) and it becomes clear: this required not only many hands, but also geometry, fixed units (the royal cubit) and checks on every course.

Source: Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 4 · Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 6 · Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 3

A block in place. This is how often it had to happen: a block every 45 seconds.
Next block in45 s

To place 2.3 million blocks in c. 20 years, a block had to be set in place on average every 45 seconds. That is calculated with 4 months of work per year (120 days) and days of 12 hours: 2,400 days × 12 hours = 103.7 million seconds, divided by 2.3 million blocks.

Blocks placed since you opened this page: 0

Bartlett calculates with the whole year and days of 10 hours and arrives at 2 to 3 minutes per block (see table). Below is the same clock at his pace: one block every 2.5 minutes. The building pace was not constant either: many blocks per hour at the bottom, fewer at the top.

Next block (Bartlett) in2:30

Blocks placed since you opened this page: 0

8.7 Medicine and chemistry: mummification

Belief in a life after death required a preserved body. In the Pyramid Texts the soul (ba) remains connected to its own body: the ba unites with its own Osiris, the mummified body in the tomb, and so gains the power to become akh (Allen 2005, pdf p. 19). The spells in the tomb of Unas contain a series of “Spells for the protection of the mummy” (pdf p. 28).

In the offering texts natron occurs, a natural salt: it is mentioned in pellets from different regions of Egypt, with reference to gods (pdf p. 30). Natron is also the substance with which the body was dried (general knowledge).

General knowledge about mummification
  • Natron draws out moisture and so slows decay.
  • Organs such as the lungs, liver, stomach and intestines were usually preserved separately; the brain was removed.
  • After drying, the body was anointed with oils and resins and wrapped in linen.
  • This requires knowledge of the body and of the action of salts, oils and resins.

The sources in this library do not describe the technique of mummification itself; the details above are general knowledge.

Source: Allen 2005, pdf p. 19 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 28 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 30 · general knowledge

Osiris. The god of life that comes into being anew is depicted as a wrapped mummy, with crossed arms and a crown.

8.8 Astronomy: orientation and calendar

Already in this early part of the research it is clear that the Egyptians knew the sky well.

  • The Great Pyramid is built so that its four sides face the four cardinal directions. Exactly how this was done is not known; the Pole Star did not indicate north at the time. According to research, the position of the sun in different seasons may have been used (Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 3)
  • The deviation from true north is only 3′6″ (Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 3)
  • The pyramid is called Akhet Khufu, “Horizon of Khufu” (Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 1)
  • The 365-day calendar was linked to the rising of Sirius just before the sun (Facts and Details, pdf p. 1)
  • The Egyptians noticed that Sirius and the sun shifted by c. 6 hours (a quarter of a day) every year and therefore knew that a leap day was needed Facts and Details, pdf p. 1

We test the further alignment of the buildings with the sun and the stars on special dates in the second part.

Source: Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 3 · Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 3 · Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 1 · Facts and Details, pdf p. 1

Akhet: the horizon. The sun between two pyramids on the Giza plateau. The Egyptian word akhet means horizon.
The sign akhet. The hieroglyph for akhet: a sun disk between two hills (general knowledge).

8.9 Religion: mythology and the building for the afterlife

The Pyramid Texts describe the world as a whole: every day the sun travels from birth to death and is reborn at sunrise with the power of Osiris. The king is taken up into this process (Allen 2005, pdf p. 19). See chapter 5 for the mythology.

The construction is the translation of this belief into stone. A pyramid complex consists of parts that each play a role in the burial and the offering cult, as the table below shows.

No Pyramid Texts have been found in the Great Pyramid (general knowledge). The oldest preserved texts are in the pyramid of Unas, the last king of the 5th dynasty (Allen 2005, pdf p. 26).

Source: Allen 2005, pdf p. 19 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 26 · general knowledge

Ra and Atum. The sun that becomes Atum at sunset and is reborn in the morning.

Parts of a pyramid complex

AspectFunctionSource
PyramidBurial chamber of the kingCheops p. 2
Valley temple (Ankhu Khufu)The body is received here and then carried along the raised road to the pyramidArchaeology p. 2
Raised road (causeway)Connection between valley temple and pyramid, half a mile (c. 800 m) longArchaeology p. 2
Mortuary temple and offering chapelPlace for the offering cultCheops p. 2
Cult pyramid and queens’ pyramidsAssociated buildings for the royal familyCheops p. 2
ShipsFor the transport of the king to and in the afterlifeCheops p. 2

Source: Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 2 · Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 1 · Archaeology 2022, pdf p. 2

Part 2: was it not chance?

Up to here, the chapters showed what the builders could do. From here on we work with one deliberate working hypothesis: the builders did not do this by chance. They knew mathematics, the size of the Earth and the planets, and they fixed the sunrise, the stars and the shafts in their buildings. We do not accept this hypothesis as truth, but test it as strictly as possible: every claim gets a measurable outcome, a margin of error, a counter-argument and, where possible, a Stellarium screenshot.

All numbers were calculated by us and can be checked (9.2). Where a theory does not hold, this is stated: an evidence system that contains only the nice outcomes proves nothing.

Reading guide to part 2
Method
9 the evidence system and the calculations
Numbers
10 π and φ · 3-4-5 · Earth scale · planets
Ground plan and sun
11 Orion ground plan · solar calendar · stars before sunrise · akhet · two mornings in the Milky Way · festival calendar
Shafts
12 Petrie’s angles · northern shafts · star clock · 9–11 November · gods
Time and control
13 precession · temples elsewhere · Spence’s north alignment · statistics
Myths
14 Sirius and Orion in the Duat · morning star · the Sun at the turning points · from god to year
Balance
15 all theories · conclusion · timeline

Chapter 9 Method: how do we test “not by chance”?

From here on we take one working hypothesis seriously: the builders did not do this by chance. This chapter lays down how we test that hypothesis, before we calculate a single number.

9.1 The evidence system: how do you test “not by chance”?

A movement in the stars or a number in a pyramid is only a clue if you know how likely it is that it turns out that way by chance. That is why every claim in this part gets the same five questions:

  • 1. What exactly is claimed? One sentence, in advance, without adjusting it afterwards.
  • 2. What is the error? The difference between prediction and measurement, in percent or degrees, plus the measurement uncertainty of the source itself.
  • 3. How much freedom did the researcher have? Were the scale factor, the year, the star or the horizon altitude fixed in advance, or was there a search until it fitted? Every choice that can be made afterwards reduces the value of the outcome (the “look-elsewhere effect”).
  • 4. What does the other side say? The strongest counter-argument is always included.
  • 5. Can it be checked? Astronomical claims get a Stellarium screenshot with all settings, so that everyone can call up the same image.

The outcome is classified into five evidence levels. A claim can never score higher than the weakest link in its chain.

LevelMeaningExample
AMeasurable fact, independently measuredAngle of the southern shaft of the King’s Chamber: 45°14′ (Petrie)
BNumber agrees within a stated margin of error; there were degrees of freedomPerimeter of Khufu × 43,200 = circumference of the Earth (−0.7%)
CCalculated celestial coincidence, reproducible in StellariumOrion’s belt stands at 45° altitude in 2580 BC
DInterpretation supported by texts or mythologySirius (Sopdet) as herald of the new year
ESpeculation without a direct sourceKnowledge of precession in 10,000 BC

The letters return in this part with every claim and in the overview of 15.1.

Source: Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 4 Orion correlation theory, pdf p. 2

Settings for all Stellarium screenshots

  • Location: latitude 29.9753° N, longitude 31.1376° E (the Sphinx), altitude 25 m. Name “Giza Sfinx”.
  • Calendar: before 1582 Stellarium automatically uses the Julian calendar and counts the year 1 BC as year 0. So 2580 BC is year −2579, and 2579 BC is year −2578.
  • Time: in Configuration → Tools set the time zone to LTST (local true solar time) if your version of Stellarium has that option. The times in the tables are solar time.
  • The Sun as clock: the Earth’s rotation is irregular; over 4600 years this adds up to about 6 hours (ΔT). So do not set the time by the clock but by the altitude of the Sun: “sunrise” is the Sun at −0.27° (with atmosphere, upper limb on the horizon), “twilight” is the Sun at −8°.
  • Atmosphere: on for sunrise images; off for measuring star altitudes. The calculated altitudes are geometric (without refraction); with atmosphere Stellarium adds up to c. 0.6° near the horizon.
  • Landscape: preferably flat without buildings. Turn on the grid and constellation lines only if the test says so.
  • File name: every screenshot has a fixed ID (e.g. K3). Save it as img/stellarium/K3.jpg; the placeholder on this page is then replaced automatically.
Control screens: 2 extra images per claim
Below every block of screenshots there is an expandable block with control screens: the same claim 2000 years earlier (ID with -V) and 2000 years later (ID with -L). An alignment with the stars is only convincing if it has disappeared in those two images. Claims about the Sun itself (the solar points K and the equinoxes E) therefore have no control screens: the solstice falls on the same day in every era, so such claims date nothing and only say something about the place and the calendar.
Why the Sun as clock?
A date in Stellarium is not the same as a clock time: the stars follow the time, the Sun follows the date. By always setting the time to a given solar altitude, both always match, whatever ΔT model Stellarium uses.

9.2 Calculations and data: where do the numbers come from?

All celestial calculations in chapters 11 to 14 were done by ourselves, with open data and fixed rules laid down before the calculations.

AspectWhat we use
StarsBright Star Catalogue (Yale, 5th edition): positions for the year 2000 and the proper motion of every star.
PrecessionThe model of Vondrák, Capitaine and Wallace (2011), valid over hundreds of thousands of years; the same model as in Stellarium.
SunPositions according to VSOP87 (via PyEphem), converted to the same precession.
TimeApparent solar time: 12:00 is the Sun due south. Dates in the Julian calendar, years counted astronomically (2580 BC = year −2579).
Place29.975° N, 31.138° E (the Sphinx). Altitudes geometric, without refraction of light in the atmosphere.
Shaft anglesPetrie 1883: King’s Chamber south 45°14′, north 31°33′; Queen’s Chamber south 38°28′, north 37°28′ Petrie 1883, §44 Petrie 1883, §56.
MarginsFixed in advance: ±0.3°, ±0.5° and ±1° in altitude; for stars off the meridian an azimuth within 25° of the shaft direction.
Stars for the shaftsA list of 33 stars fixed in advance: all stars that other researchers link with the shafts or the orientation (Trimble, Badawy, Bauval, Spence), all of Orion, the Great and Little Bear, the northern stars from a first exploration and every star that appears elsewhere in this book. Every star is tested on every shaft; only then do we link anything to a hypothesis (12.1).

Stellarium may differ from our results by a few tenths of a degree because of refraction, ΔT and the time to the minute.

Source: Vondrák et al. 2011 · Petrie 1883, §44 · Petrie 1883, §56

Why these rules in advance?

Whoever may choose the star, the margin or the year after calculating almost always finds something (the look-elsewhere effect, 9.1). That is why the stars, the margins and the shaft angles are fixed before we calculate a year. Where we do choose afterwards, as with 9 November (12.4), this is stated, with the corresponding probability.

Chapter 10 Numbers in stone

π, the golden ratio, 3-4-5, the size of the Earth and the planets: which numbers are hidden in the dimensions of the pyramids, and how likely is it that this is chance?

10.1 Mathematics: π, the golden ratio and the seked

Test cardB
Claim
The shape of the Great Pyramid contains π (perimeter = 2π × height) and/or the golden ratio φ.
Measurement and error
π: −0.09%; φ: +0.001%. The height is a reconstruction (the top is missing).
Degrees of freedom
Two constants and several dimensions (base, apothem, slope) to choose from.
Strongest counter-argument
A single seked of 5½ palms (14 : 11) yields π and φ at the same time; the measurement cannot choose between them.
Check
No Stellarium needed; a new measurement of base or slope does not change the outcome.

Two theories explain the shape of the Great Pyramid: the π theory (the perimeter of the base is the circumference of a circle with the height as radius) and the golden-ratio theory (the cross-section is a Kepler triangle with ratio 1 : √φ : φ). Both fit to within 0.1%.

RelationPredictionMeasured / modelError
π: perimeter of base = 2π × heightheight = 2 × base / π = 146.65 m146.515 m (Bartlett)−0,09%
π in royal cubits: 2 × 440 / 28022/7 = 3,14286π = 3,14159+0,04%
φ: apothem / half baseφ = 1,6180341.61805 (Bartlett’s dimensions)+0,001%
φ in royal cubits (440 × 280)φ = 1,6180341,61859+0,03%
Kepler triangle: height / half base√φ = 1,272021,27273 (14:11)+0,06%
Slope of the face51.854° (π) or 51.827° (φ)51,843° (14:11) / 51°50′±0,02°

Base 230.363 m and height 146.515 m according to Bartlett (2014); the royal cubit is 0.5236 m = 7 palms = 28 fingers. The height is a reconstruction, because the top is missing.

What does the other side say? The two numbers are 0.14 m apart (146.51 m versus 146.65 m), much less than the uncertainty in the height of a pyramid without its top. So the measurement cannot choose between π and φ. The simplest explanation is a seked of 5½ palms, i.e. the ratio 14 : 11 (280 : 220 cubits). That gives π and φ as by-products within 0.06%. Ramirez shows that π and φ are linked via π ≈ 4/√φ (deviation 0.1%), so whoever sees one automatically sees the other.

Bartlett does not reject either theory, but argues that the shape also follows from the Egyptian canon of human body proportions.

Assessment B Numerically strong (≤ 0.1%), but the degrees of freedom are large: two theories, several dimensions, and the top is missing. It proves that the ratio 14:11 was chosen, not that π or φ was intended.

Source: Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 4 Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 5 Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 7 Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 8 Ramirez 2018, pdf p. 1 Ramirez 2018, pdf p. 2 Furlong, pdf p. 1

π in the Great Pyramid. Infographic: the perimeter of the base divided by the height gives 2π.
Golden ratio in the Great Pyramid. Infographic: the apothem divided by half the base gives φ.

10.2 Mathematics: Pythagoras, 3-4-5 and the King’s Chamber

Test cardB
Claim
Khafre is built as a 3-4-5 triangle; the King’s Chamber is 2 : 4 : √5 with a space diagonal of 25 cubits.
Measurement and error
Khafre: 0.03°; height of the King’s Chamber: 0.3%.
Degrees of freedom
A room has many diagonals and ratios; one was chosen afterwards.
Strongest counter-argument
The oldest 3 : 4 calculation (papyrus Berlin 6619) is more than six centuries younger.
Check
Check the measurements of Petrie (1883) or Dormion.

The Pythagorean theorem and the 3-4-5 triangle appear in two places: in the pyramid of Khafre and in the King’s Chamber.

Khafre. A height of 274 cubits and a half base of 205.5 cubits give exactly 4 : 3 (274 / 205.5 = 1.3333). The slope is then 53.13° and the seked 5¼ palms. The Dutch Wikipedia gives 53°13′; the difference from the perfect 3-4-5 angle is 0.03°.

AspectDimension (cubits)Check
King’s Chamber width × length × height10 × 20 × √125 (= 11.18)5.24 m × 10.47 m × 5.85 m
Space diagonal√(10² + 20² + 125) = √625 = 25whole number
Wall diagonal (length × height)√(20² + 125) = √525 ≈ 22,9—
3-4-5 triangleheight line √(2² + (√5)²) = √9 = 3; length 4; diagonal 5 (in units of 10 cubits)see figure
15-20-25 triangle15 = √(10² + 125), 20 = length, 25 = space diagonalexact

Ratio width : length : height = 2 : 4 : √5; all diagonals are then whole numbers or multiples of √5.

What does the other side say? The dimension 10 × 20 cubits is ordinary. The height of √125 cubits (11.18 cubits, measured 5.85 m) is exactly the height needed to make the space diagonal 25 cubits (25² = 10² + 20² + 125). That may be a deliberate choice, but it may also be a chance result of a room about 11 cubits high: the measured height (11.17 cubits) differs only 0.3% from 11.18 cubits, and a measurement error of a few centimetres does not change the picture. Nor is it recorded anywhere that the builders ever wanted the space diagonal as a dimension. An Egyptian arithmetic problem with a 3 : 4 ratio (papyrus Berlin 6619) is known from the Middle Kingdom, more than six centuries later; no mathematical text survives from the Fourth Dynasty. Papyrus Berlin 6619 (Wikipedia)

Assessment B Khafre = 3-4-5 is exact and cannot be accidental (the angle is a choice). The King’s Chamber is exact, but the link with conscious knowledge of the theorem remains level D.

Source: Wikipedia: Chefren, pdf p. 1 Furlong, pdf p. 1 Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 7

The King’s Chamber as a 3-4-5 triangle. The dimensions of the King’s Chamber contain a 3-4-5 triangle and a 2-3-√5 triangle. According to Petrie, the floor (17 ft) and the foot of the wall (19.007 ft) are not at the same level.
The Grand Gallery. The high, steeply rising passage that leads to the King’s Chamber.
The King’s Chamber with the stone chest. The King’s Chamber (10 × 20 cubits) with the granite sarcophagus; below the large dimensions the floor and walls that contain the 3-4-5 triangle.

10.3 The size of the Earth: 1 : 43,200

Test cardB
Claim
The Great Pyramid is a scale model of the northern hemisphere at 1 : 43,200.
Measurement and error
Perimeter −0.67% (equator) or −0.50% (meridian); height −0.43% (polar radius).
Degrees of freedom
Scale factor chosen afterwards; choice between equator, meridian, polar radius and mean radius.
Strongest counter-argument
The size of the Earth was only determined around 240 BC; 43,200 belongs to a later (Babylonian) time reckoning.
Check
Cannot be tested without a text from the 4th dynasty.

The Great Pyramid is said to be a scale model of the Earth at 1 : 43,200: the perimeter of the base is then the circumference of the Earth and the height is the polar radius. The numbers agree to within 0.7%.

Comparison (scale 1 : 43,200)PyramidEarth / 43,200Error
Perimeter of base (4 × 230.363 m) vs. equatorial circumference 40,075 km921.45 m927.66 m−0,67%
same vs. meridian circumference 40,008 km921.45 m926.11 m−0,50%
Height (146.515 m) vs. polar radius 6357 km146.52 m147.15 m−0,43%
Height vs. mean radius 6371 km146.52 m147.47 m−0,65%
Half perimeter vs. 1 s of rotation at the equator (463.83 m)460.73 m463.83 m−0,67%
Half perimeter vs. 1 s of rotation at the latitude of Giza (401.79 m)460.73 m401.79 m+14,7%

The infographic calculates with 1760 cubits × 0.5236 m = 921.5 m, but under “1760 royal cubits × 43,200 ≈ 40,075,017 m” gives a value that is incorrect: 1760 × 0.5236 × 43,200 = 39,810 km. For 40,075 km a base of 927.7 m (1771.7 cubits) is needed.

What does the other side say?

  • Circular reasoning. The number 43,200 is half a day in seconds (86,400 / 2). The two “derivations” (scale and one second of Earth rotation) are therefore the same equation and do not count twice. The second (1/86,400 of a day) did not exist in the Old Kingdom; that division comes from Babylonian and Hellenistic times.
  • Free scale factor. With a scale factor that may be freely chosen, any building fits some planet or measure. 43,200 was chosen afterwards so that the perimeter fits; the height is then the second measurement that must fit independently, and it does so with −0.43%.
  • Size of the Earth. The circumference of the Earth was only determined around 240 BC by Eratosthenes. An earlier measuring project would have required surveyors to measure an arc of many degrees; there is no text about it.
  • Error in the infographic. The rotation speed of 463.8 m/s applies at the equator. At the latitude of Giza it is 401.8 m/s; the link with the half perimeter (460.7 m) therefore only holds at the equator.
Assessment B Two independent dimensions (perimeter and height) at 0.4 to 0.7% is striking, but the scale factor was chosen afterwards and the knowledge it requires (the size of the Earth) has not been demonstrated. Without textual evidence this remains an indication.

Source: Jelitto 2015, pdf p. 13 Bartlett 2014, pdf p. 7

The Earth scale 1 : 43,200. Infographic: the perimeter of the base (1760 cubits) times 43,200 is approximately the equatorial circumference. Note its own caveat: 432 is treated here as a symbolic number, not as proof.

10.4 Mercury and Venus: the morning stars to scale

Test cardE
Claim
Khufu, Khafre and Menkaure are Earth, Venus and Mercury to scale.
Measurement and error
Earth 0.4–0.7%; Venus 2.2–2.4%; Mercury 8.5–16.7%.
Degrees of freedom
Two different scales (1 : 43,200 and 1 : 86,400,000); chosen planetary distance; adjusted perimeter of Menkaure.
Strongest counter-argument
Planetary diameters can only be measured with a telescope; Mercury does not fit.
Check
None; calculation only.

Jelitto (2015) suggests that the three great pyramids represent the three inner planets: Khufu = Earth, Khafre = Venus, Menkaure = Mercury. Venus and Mercury are the “morning stars”: they never move far from the Sun and stand above the horizon just before sunrise.

Size (scale 1 : 43,200)

Pyramid ↔ planetDimensionPyramidPlanet / 43,200Error
Khufu ↔ Earthperimeter921.4 m927.7 m−0,7%
height ↔ polar radius146.5 m147.1 m−0,4%
Khafre ↔ Venusperimeter861.0 m880.2 m−2,2%
height ↔ polar radius143.5 m140.1 m+2,4%
Menkaure ↔ Mercuryperimeter (actual 414 m)414 m354.8 m+16,7%
perimeter (Jelitto model 385 m)385 m354.8 m+8,5%
height ↔ polar radius65.5 m56.5 m+16,0%

Planetary dimensions: equatorial circumference Earth 40,075 km, Venus 38,025 km, Mercury 15,329 km; polar radii 6357, 6052 and 2440 km. Error = (pyramid − planet) / planet.

Mutual distance (scale 1 : 86,400,000)

Distance on the plateauMeasured (Petrie)Model (scale 1 : 86,400,000)Error
Khufu – Khafre (Earth – Venus)486.88 m463 m (40 million km)+5,2%
Khufu – Menkaure (Earth – Mercury)936.16 m891 m (77 million km)+5,0%
same with the actual minimum distances486.88 m / 936.16 m442 m (38.2 million km) / 895 m (77.3 million km)+10,1% / +4,6%

Herman (2020) gives 482 m and 897 m as measurements in the image; the errors are then −4% and −1%. With Petrie’s figures they are slightly higher.

What does the other side say?

  • Two different scales. For size the scale is 1 : 43,200, for distance 1 : 86,400,000 (2000 times smaller). There is no model with a single scale.
  • Menkaure does not fit. For Mercury the actual perimeter of 414 m had to be replaced by 385 m; even then an error of +8.5% remains. Only Khufu (−0.7%) and Khafre (−2.2%) fit well.
  • Moving targets. The Earth–Venus distance varies between 38 and 261 million km. The model uses the minimum distance; that is a choice.
  • Planetary dimensions. The diameters of Venus and Mercury could only be measured with the telescope (17th century and later). Deliberate dimensioning requires an explanation of how the builders knew this. There is no source; the comparison remains a modern observation.

Jelitto also calculates when Mercury, Venus and Earth ever had the same mutual angles as the pyramids on the plateau (Petrie distances). This astronomical calculation shows that such configurations exist; they lie far outside the 4th dynasty and therefore give no date.

Assessment B Earth and Venus fit (≤ 2.2%), Mercury does not (≥ 8.5%). Of the three, Khufu = Earth is the most convincing; the planetary picture as a whole remains level E.

Source: Jelitto 2015, pdf p. 13 Jelitto 2015, pdf p. 14 Allen 2005, pdf p. 448

Scale and correlation of the Giza pyramids and the inner planets. Herman (2020) based on Jelitto: pyramids with the planets as circles, the tables with the perimeters and errors.
Alignment of the planets. Schematic orbit diagram: Mercury, Venus and Earth in line with the Sun, as calculated by Jelitto.
Mercury, Venus and Earth. Diameters 4880 km, 12,104 km and 12,756 km. Venus is 5% smaller than the Earth; Mercury is 38% of the Earth.
The morning stars in the texts
In the Pyramid Texts the planet Venus is called the Morning God, the herald of sunrise who is associated with Horus. Allen 2005, pdf p. 448

Chapter 11 Ground plan, sun and horizon

The position of the pyramids, the Sphinx and the causeway relative to Orion, the rising Sun and the stars of the morning.

11.1 Orion: the ground plan and the link with the belt

Test cardC
Claim
The three pyramids lie like the three stars of Orion’s belt.
Measurement and error
Ratio of the distances 9.6%; bend 11.5° versus 7.5°.
Degrees of freedom
Three points may be mirrored, rotated and scaled.
Strongest counter-argument
Krupp and Fairall: the angle with north does not fit (47–50° versus 38°).
Check
The satellite photo with the belt overlaid (above); a separate screenshot adds nothing.

Bauval’s Orion correlation theory (1989) says that the three great pyramids mirror the three stars of Orion’s belt: Khufu = Alnitak, Khafre = Alnilam, Menkaure = Mintaka. Orion is Sah, the soul of Osiris; in the Pyramid Texts the king is linked with Osiris and Orion at his death.

MeasurementPyramids (Petrie)Orion’s belt (J2000)Difference
Distance between 1st and 2nd (Khufu–Khafre ↔ Alnitak–Alnilam)486.88 m1,356°—
Distance between 2nd and 3rd (Khafre–Menkaure ↔ Alnilam–Mintaka)453.98 m1,386°—
Ratio (1st:2nd) / (2nd:3rd)1,0720,9789,6%
Deviation from a straight line at the middle star11,5°7,5°4,0°
Total length (1st to 3rd)936.16 m2,736°—

Orion positions: Alnitak 05h40m45.5s −1°56′34″, Alnilam 05h36m12.8s −1°12′07″, Mintaka 05h32m00.4s −0°17′57″. Belt and Nile are mirrored: the Milky Way is seen as a celestial Nile.

What does the other side say? The mutual distances do not match: the ratio differs by 9.6% and the bend in the row is 11.5° versus 7.5°. The belt is not a copy of the ground plan, but a rough resemblance of three points in a row with a bend to the same side. With three points and a few freedoms (mirroring, rotating, scaling) such a resemblance is not rare. Moreover, the astronomers Krupp and Fairall found with planetarium equipment that in the period named by Bauval and Hancock (10,500 BC) the belt makes an angle of 47–50° with north, versus 38° for the pyramids. In our own calculation (Vondrák precession) these two angles only agree around 12,000 BC; that is therefore a date the theory needs, not a date the theory produces.

What remains? The connection with Orion lies not in the shape but in the altitude: the belt passes through the sky at 45° above the horizon, exactly the angle of the southern shaft of the King’s Chamber. This is tested with Stellarium in 12.1.

Assessment C The ground plan is a resemblance, not a geometric copy (error 9.6%). The stronger claim is the shaft angle (12.1).

Source: Orion correlation theory, pdf p. 1 Orion correlation theory, pdf p. 2 Jelitto 2015, pdf p. 13 Allen 2005, pdf p. 449 Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 3

Orion’s belt over Giza. Satellite image of Giza with the three stars of the belt overlaid (Orion correlation theory).

11.2 Sphinx and causeway as a solar calendar

Test cardC
Claim
The Sphinx and the causeway mark the sunrise at the equinox and at ⅓ and ⅔ of the year: a solar calendar.
Measurement and error
K3/K5 1.8 and 2.5 days from the season boundary at 104°; 4–5 days at 105°.
Degrees of freedom
Eight “nice” dates per year; 1° of causeway direction = c. 3 days.
Strongest counter-argument
The direction is a map value; the horizon is not flat; there is no text that describes this.
Check
K1–K7 (all seven placed).

Was the Sphinx with its causeway (Khafre’s raised road) built as a calendar that marks the place of sunrise on the horizon? The working hypothesis of this research is: the solar year begins at the summer solstice of 2580 BC (15 July, Julian), when the Sun rises furthest north. The Egyptian New Year (Wepet Renpet), the first morning on which Sirius can be seen again, falls two days later: 17 July (M2 in 14.1b). The year 2580 was chosen because it falls in the middle of Khufu’s reign (c. 2589–2566 BC); it is a reference year, not a result.

This produces a series of fixed moments, calculated below. The azimuth of the Sun at rising is measured from north (east = 90°).

IDEventDate (Julian / Gregorian)Azimuth at risingDays after the solsticeFraction of the yearCivil day (30-day months)Difference
K1Summer solstice: start of the solar year (furthest north); New Year with Sirius 2 days later15 Jul 2580 BC / 24 Jun61,5°000—
K2Autumn equinox: Sun straight in front of the Sphinx13 Oct 2580 BC / 22 Sep89,5°90,30,24790 (start of month 4)+0.3 d
K3Sun above the causeway (1st time) = ⅓ year13 Nov 2580 BC / 23 Oct104,0°121,80,3335120 (start of Peret)+1.8 d
K4Winter solstice (furthest south)9 Jan 2579 BC / 19 Dec117,4°178,80,489180 (start of month 7)−1.3 d
K5Sun above the causeway (2nd time) = ⅔ year9 Mar 2579 BC / 16 Feb104,0°237,50,650240 (start of Shemu)−2.5 d
K6Spring equinox: Sun again straight in front of the Sphinx12 Apr 2579 BC / 22 Mar89,5°271,10,742270 (start of month 10)+1.1 d
K7Summer solstice: the year comes full circle15 Jul 2579 BC / 24 Jun61,5°365,21,000365+0.2 d

Calculated for the Sphinx (29.975° N) with a flat horizon and the moment of sunrise “upper limb on the horizon”. The dates are ±1 day: find in Stellarium the day on which the azimuth of the Sun at rising equals the table value. Sensitivity: with a causeway direction of 103.5° or 105° the first passage shifts to day 120.6 or 124.2 respectively and the second to day 238.7 or 234.9 respectively.

If we count from New Year (17 July, Sirius) instead of from the solstice, two days are subtracted: K2 day 88.3 (−1.7 d relative to day 90), K3 day 119.8 (−0.2 d relative to day 120), K4 day 176.8 (−3.2 d), K5 day 235.5 (−4.5 d relative to day 240) and K6 day 269.1 (−0.9 d). The first causeway passage then fits the end of Akhet even better, the second less well. Day numbers elsewhere in this book are counted from the solstice, unless it says “after New Year”.

What stands out?

  • The Sphinx faces the equinox point. Its gaze is at 90°; the Sun stands there on the day of the autumn and spring equinox (azimuth 89.5°, a difference of 0.5° due to refraction and the position of the solar limb).
  • The causeway lies at 104° (map value 104–105°) and the Sun stands there on 13 November (K3) and 9 March (K5). K3 falls at 0.3335 of the year, so at ⅓.
  • The civil year fits. The Egyptian year has 12 months of 30 days (360) plus 5 days, in three seasons Akhet, Peret and Shemu of 4 months (120 days). The first causeway passage falls 1.8 days after the end of Akhet (day 120), the second 2.5 days before the end of Peret (day 240). The quarter points of the civil year (days 90, 180, 270) fall within 1.3 days of the equinoxes and the winter solstice.
  • ¼, ½ and ¾ of the real year do not fall on the solstices. Because the Earth’s orbit is not circular, the seasons are unequal: 0.247, 0.489 and 0.742 of the year. The hypothesis “a quarter year = autumn equinox” therefore holds to within 1 day (0.247 versus 0.25), “half year = winter solstice” to within 3.9 days (0.489 versus 0.5) and “three quarters = spring equinox” to within 2.8 days.

What does the other side say? (1) The direction of 104° is a map value; a deviation of 1° shifts the dates by 3 days. (2) The horizon around Giza is not flat (Mokattam hills in the east), which changes the azimuth of rising by a few tenths of a degree. (3) A Sun shining along a long road does not make a calendar: there is no text from the Old Kingdom that describes this. (4) In a 365-day year without a leap day the civil year slips 1 day every 4 years; over a lifetime (60 years) that is 15 days. The calendar can therefore only serve as fixed reference points.

Assessment C The solar points themselves are calculated exactly. The quarter points of the civil year lie almost automatically near the equinoxes (a quarter year is 91 days, the civil quarter 90). The only independent coincidence is the causeway on day 120: a random direction falls within 2.5 days of such a month boundary with a probability of 5/30 = 1 in 6, and the second passage follows from the first through the symmetry around the winter solstice. Nice, but statistically weak.

Source: Ancient Society, pdf p. 1 Ancient Society, pdf p. 2 Nile Scribes, pdf p. 3 Nile Scribes, pdf p. 4 Facts and Details, pdf p. 1

The Sphinx and the causeway. The Sphinx faces east; on the left the raised road (causeway) from the pyramid of Khafre to the Sphinx and the Valley Temple.
Direction of the causeway: 104°–105°. Map of the plateau. Khafre’s causeway runs at 104°–105° relative to north; Khufu’s causeway (51°52′) is marked separately on the map.
B11-1The Sun straight in front of the Sphinx at the equinoximage still to find

What it should show a photo of the rising Sun on 20/21 March or 22/23 September, taken from behind or beside the Sphinx, with the Sun rising straight in line with its gaze.

Why here the Sphinx faces the equinox point (azimuth 89.5°); a photo from that day makes the claim verifiable.

Search term Sphinx equinox sunrise aligned
Save as img/jpg/b11-1.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.
Solstices and equinoxes. The four points of the Earth’s orbit. Note the unequal lengths of the seasons: summer and spring are the longest.

Stellarium screenshots: the seven solar points (K1–K7)

K1Summer solstice: start of the solar yearscreenshot missing
Date
15 July 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian)
Time
Sun at −0.27°: c. 04:56 solar time
View direction
east-northeast, look from the Sphinx towards 61° (field of view c. 50°)
Expected in the image
  • Sun at azimuth 61.5°, declination +23.98°
  • Regulus near the Sun (azimuth 63°, altitude 2°)
  • The Sun is furthest north: the start of Akhet
Test The Sun rises to the left of the Sphinx’s line of sight, 28.5° north of east.
Save file as img/stellarium/K1.jpg
K1 – Summer solstice: start of the solar year. The Sun rises to the left of the Sphinx’s line of sight, 28.5° north of east.
K2Quarter year: autumn equinoxscreenshot missing
Date
13 October 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
c. 05:56 solar time
View direction
east (90°), from the Sphinx (field of view c. 50°)
Expected in the image
  • Sun at azimuth 89.5°, declination 0°
  • Sun exactly in line with the Sphinx’s gaze
Test Check that day and night are equal (declination 0°).
Save file as img/stellarium/K2.jpg
K2 – Quarter year: autumn equinox. Check that day and night are equal (declination 0°).
K3First third: sun above the causewayscreenshot missing
Date
13 November 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
c. 06:25 solar time
View direction
east-southeast (104°), along Khafre’s causeway (field of view c. 50°)
Expected in the image
  • Sun at azimuth 104.0°, declination −12.5°
  • Day counter: 121.8 days after the solstice (0.3335 year)
Test Draw the causeway line (104–105°) in the image and measure whether the Sun rises above it.
Save file as img/stellarium/K3.jpg
K3 – First third: sun above the causeway. Draw the causeway line (104–105°) in the image and measure whether the Sun rises above it.
K4Winter solstice: furthest southscreenshot missing
Date
9 January 2579 BC (year −2578)
Time
c. 06:55 solar time
View direction
southeast (117°) (field of view c. 50°)
Expected in the image
  • Sun at azimuth 117.4°, declination −23.98°
  • Day 178.8 (0.489 year)
Test Turning point: in the days after this date the Sun rises further north again.
Save file as img/stellarium/K4.jpg
K4 – Winter solstice: furthest south. Turning point: in the days after this date the Sun rises further north again.
K5Second third: above the causeway againscreenshot missing
Date
9 March 2579 BC (year −2578)
Time
c. 06:25 solar time
View direction
east-southeast (104°) (field of view c. 50°)
Expected in the image
  • Sun at azimuth 104.0° (same as K3)
  • Day 237.5 (0.650 year), 2.5 days before the civil boundary Peret/Shemu (day 240)
Test Compare with K3: the Sun is in the same place, the image should be identical.
Save file as img/stellarium/K5.jpg
K5 – Second third: above the causeway again. Compare with K3: the Sun is in the same place, the image should be identical.
K6Spring equinox: in front of the Sphinx againscreenshot missing
Date
12 April 2579 BC (year −2578)
Time
c. 05:56 solar time
View direction
east (90°) (field of view c. 50°)
Expected in the image
  • Sun at azimuth 89.5°, declination 0°
  • Day 271.1 (0.742 year)
Test Same image as K2, six months later.
Save file as img/stellarium/K6.jpg
K6 – Spring equinox: in front of the Sphinx again. Same image as K2, six months later.
K7Full circle: summer solsticescreenshot missing
Date
15 July 2579 BC (year −2578)
Time
c. 04:56 solar time
View direction
east-northeast (61°) (field of view c. 50°)
Expected in the image
  • Sun at azimuth 61.5°
  • Day 365.2: 1/4 day late on the civil year (365 days)
Test The Sun is back at the starting point: the year has come full circle.
Save file as img/stellarium/K7.jpg
K7 – Full circle: summer solstice. The Sun is back at the starting point: the year has come full circle.

11.3 Stars before sunrise: gods, calendar and mythology

Test cardD
Claim
At the solar points, stars of important gods stand in the sky before sunrise; Sirius at New Year.
Measurement and error
Sirius heliacal 1.4–4.4 days after the summer solstice (2580 BC).
Degrees of freedom
The six solar points and the moment (Sun at −8°) are fixed in advance; for the Egyptians the morning was the moment to look at the stars. What is free is which of the visible stars we link to a god.
Strongest counter-argument
Only Sirius, Orion and the Great Bear are attested as constellations for the Old Kingdom.
Check
D1–D6 with controls -V/-L (all placed).

At each of the six solar points, different stars stand above the horizon just before sunrise. The question is whether this allows a link between stars, calendar and mythology: was a star of an important god in the sky at New Year?

IDDateVisible in twilight (Sun −8°), left to right from north to southSun at risingMythological reading
D115 Jul 2580 BC (K1)Castor/Pollux (azimuth 76°, altitude 27–32°), Procyon (91°, 11°), Betelgeuse (114°, 26°), Sirius (115°, 0.3°, just risen), Orion’s belt (123°, 21–23°), Rigel (132°, 17°)azimuth 61.5°, close to Regulus (the lion)Orion (Sah = Osiris) climbs up before Sirius (Sopdet = Isis); the lion star rises together with the Sun. Sirius itself appears for the first time two days later, at New Year (17 July, M2 in 14.1b).
D213 Oct 2580 BC (K2)Arcturus (51°, 29°), Spica (92°, 31°, almost straight above the Sphinx)azimuth 89.5°No well-attested Egyptian figure; in later texts Spica is an “ear of grain” star (harvest).
D313 Nov 2580 BC (K3)Antares (108°, 17°), Shaula (114°, 1°), α Centauri (145°, 11°)azimuth 104° (above the causeway)Antares lies in the group of stars later read as the Scorpion (Serket); not attested for the Old Kingdom.
D49 Jan 2579 BC (K4)Deneb (59°, 19°), Altair (99°, 33°)azimuth 117.4°No reliable identification in the sources.
D59 Mar 2579 BC (K5)Mirfak, Hamal (93°, 3° at rising), Fomalhaut (157°, 10°)azimuth 104°Hamal (Aries) stands near the Sun; a link with Amun/Khnum is late mythology.
D612 Apr 2579 BC (K6)Capella (58°, 1°), Mirfak (69°, 17°), Hamal (100°, 15°)azimuth 89.5°Spring equinox: Aries, see D5.

Azimuth from north; altitudes are geometric without refraction. D7 equals D1 (year full circle). Each star is given with its position in twilight; the sun itself has not yet risen.

The strongest link: Sirius at New Year

The Egyptians began their year at the heliacal rising of Sirius (Sopdet): the first morning on which the star is visible again shortly before sunrise. That coincided with the beginning of the Nile flood. In the Pyramid Texts Sirius is linked with Isis and Orion with Osiris; the king ascends to both.

Sun altitudeSirius altitudeFirst visible morningDays after the solstice
−6°3°16 July 2580 BC (Julian) = 25 June+1,4
−8°2°17 July 2580 BC+2,4
−8°3°18 July 2580 BC+3,4
−10°1°19 July 2580 BC+4,4

The four lines are common limits for the visibility of a bright star (depth of the Sun and altitude of the star). They are calculated without an atmospheric model.

In 2580 BC that rising therefore fell 1.4 to 4.4 days after the summer solstice: the heliacal rising of Sirius and the start of the solar year coincide to within a few days. That gap grows by about 0.75 days per century (with Sun −8° and star 3°: −4.2 days in 3580 BC, 0 days around 3100 BC, +3.4 days in 2580 BC and +7.2 days in 2080 BC). So Sirius and the solstice coincided best around the time the calendar came into being, not exactly in Khufu’s time. The Gregorian date (25 June) fits the remark that Sirius rose in “late June” between 3000 and 2500 BC. The model was also checked against the Sirius calculation of Vodolazhskaya et al. (2767 BC), with which it agreed.

Four corner stars

StarEcliptic longitude 2580 BCSeasonal pointDifference
Regulus (Leo)86,8°summer solstice (90°)3,2°
Antares (Scorpius)186,4°autumn equinox (180°)6,4°
Fomalhaut (Piscis Austrinus)270,0°winter solstice (270°)0,0°
Aldebaran (Taurus)6,4°spring equinox (360°)6,4°

In Persian tradition these four are the “royal stars” (the guardians of the four corners of the sky). That is a much younger tradition than the Fourth Dynasty.

Which constellation at the winter solstice? Fomalhaut is the bright star in the mouth of the Southern Fish (Piscis Austrinus), the small constellation below the feet of Aquarius; it stands 20° below the ecliptic. Directly above it, at the same longitude, stands Sadalmelik in Aquarius; that is where the Sun itself stood at the winter solstice of 2580 BC (0.1°). The Pisces of the zodiac and Aries lie further away: the vernal point only moved into Aries around 1900 BC and into Pisces around AD 70 (2.3). Aries (Hamal) did stand 15° high above the Sphinx on the morning of the spring equinox (D6). More about the Sun at the turning points and the gods that belong there in 14.2, and about the two mornings on which the Sun stands in the Milky Way in 11.5.

What does the other side say? (1) For the Old Kingdom only Sirius, Orion and the Great Bear (the “Foreleg”) are reliably established as Egyptian constellations; all other readings are later or uncertain. (2) Every day there is some bright constellation in the eastern sky: any desired combination can be found with a little searching. (3) The “four corner stars” stand at the seasonal points in 2580 BC because precession put them roughly in that place at the time; the same would apply to any building from the period 3000–2000 BC.

Assessment D Sirius (New Year, Isis) and Orion (Osiris) are a real, source-supported link between star, calendar and myth. The other stars on the other dates remain level E until a text names them.

Source: Heliacal Rising of Sirius, pdf p. 3 Nile Scribes, pdf p. 4 Vodolazhskaya et al. 2015, pdf p. 1 Allen 2005, pdf p. 448 Allen 2005, pdf p. 449 Allen 2005, pdf p. 452 Ancient Society, pdf p. 1

How to read this table
Each sunrise (K1–K7) has a twilight screen (D1–D6). In Stellarium set the Sun to −8°, look east and turn on the star labels. The azimuth and altitude values in the table are what you should find.
Heliacal rising of Sirius. Example of the heliacal rising, seen from Boston on 13 August at 5:20: Sirius stands about 50° (five fists) from the rising Sun. At Giza in 2580 BC this distance just before sunrise was much the same.

Stellarium screenshots: the stars before sunrise (D1–D6)

D1Solstice: Orion up, Sirius on the horizonscreenshot missing
Date
15 July 2580 BC
Time
Sun at −8° (c. 04:17)
View direction
east-southeast (azimuth 115°), altitude 15° (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Sirius just above the horizon (0.3°)
  • Orion’s belt at 21–23°
  • Betelgeuse 26°, Procyon 11°
Test Shows the visibility of Orion and Sirius before sunrise on the solstice. Sirius is still on the horizon and cannot be seen; two days later, at New Year (17 July), it can (M2 in 14.1b).
Save file as img/stellarium/D1.jpg
D1 – Solstice: Orion up, Sirius on the horizon. Shows the visibility of Orion and Sirius before sunrise on the solstice. Sirius is still on the horizon and cannot be seen; two days later, at New Year (17 July), it can (M2 in 14.1b).
D2Autumn equinox: Spica above the Sphinxscreenshot missing
Date
13 October 2580 BC
Time
Sun at −8° (c. 05:23)
View direction
east (90°), altitude 20° (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Spica at 31° altitude, azimuth 92°
  • Arcturus 29° azimuth 51°
Test Spica stands on the axis of the Sphinx.
Save file as img/stellarium/D2.jpg
D2 – Autumn equinox: Spica above the Sphinx. Spica stands on the axis of the Sphinx.
D3First third: Antaresscreenshot missing
Date
13 November 2580 BC
Time
Sun at −8° (c. 05:52)
View direction
east-southeast (azimuth 108°) (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Antares at 17°, azimuth 108°
  • α Centauri 11°, azimuth 145°
Test Compare with the causeway direction of 104°.
Save file as img/stellarium/D3.jpg
D3 – First third: Antares. Compare with the causeway direction of 104°.
D4Winter solstice: Altair and Denebscreenshot missing
Date
9 January 2579 BC
Time
Sun at −8° (c. 06:19)
View direction
east-southeast (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Altair at 33°, azimuth 99°
  • Deneb at 19°, azimuth 59°
Test Turning point of the year; no god confirmed.
Save file as img/stellarium/D4.jpg
D4 – Winter solstice: Altair and Deneb. Turning point of the year; no god confirmed.
D5Second third: Hamal and Fomalhautscreenshot missing
Date
9 March 2579 BC
Time
Sun at −8° (c. 05:52)
View direction
east-southeast (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Fomalhaut at 10°, azimuth 157°
  • Hamal (Aries) at 3° at sunrise
Test Fomalhaut stands at ecliptic longitude 270°.
Save file as img/stellarium/D5.jpg
D5 – Second third: Hamal and Fomalhaut. Fomalhaut stands at ecliptic longitude 270°.
D6Spring equinox: Hamal above the Sphinxscreenshot missing
Date
12 April 2579 BC
Time
Sun at −8° (c. 05:23)
View direction
east (90°) (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Hamal (Aries) at 15°, azimuth 100°
  • Mirfak 17°, azimuth 69°
Test Aries stands in the line of the axis at the start of the new sowing.
Save file as img/stellarium/D6.jpg
D6 – Spring equinox: Hamal above the Sphinx. Aries stands in the line of the axis at the start of the new sowing.
Control screens for D1–D6: the same claim 2000 years earlier (-V) and 2000 years later (-L)

An alignment only counts as evidence if it disappears when you shift the time. Set up the same image in Stellarium (same location, same solar altitude or the same star on the meridian), but change only the year. Save as img/stellarium/<ID>-V.jpg and <ID>-L.jpg.

D1-VSolstice: Sirius and Orion – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4580 BC (year −4579)
Time
Sun at −8°, the same solar longitude
View direction
east, same as the main screen (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Sirius: altitude 11.0°, azimuth 132.9°
  • Alnilam: altitude 27.0°, azimuth 149.5°
  • Betelgeuse: altitude 35.0°, azimuth 142.9°
  • Heliacal rising of Sirius: 10.7 days before the solstice
Test Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
Save file as img/stellarium/D1-V.jpg
D1-V – Solstice: Sirius and Orion – 2000 years earlier. Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
D1-LSolstice: Sirius and Orion – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
580 BC (year −579)
Time
Sun at −8°, the same solar longitude
View direction
east, same as the main screen (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Sirius: altitude -15.2°, azimuth 100.6°
  • Alnilam: altitude 7.5°, azimuth 102.1°
  • Betelgeuse: altitude 10.1°, azimuth 92.5°
  • Heliacal rising of Sirius: 20.0 days after the solstice
Test Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
Save file as img/stellarium/D1-L.jpg
D1-L – Solstice: Sirius and Orion – 2000 years later. Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
D2-VSpica above the Sphinx – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4580 BC (year −4579)
Time
Sun at −8°, the same solar longitude
View direction
east, same as the main screen (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Spica: altitude 57.8°, azimuth 99.4°
  • Arcturus: altitude 49.0°, azimuth 36.9°
Test Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
Save file as img/stellarium/D2-V.jpg
D2-V – Spica above the Sphinx – 2000 years earlier. Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
D2-LSpica above the Sphinx – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
580 BC (year −579)
Time
Sun at −8°, the same solar longitude
View direction
east, same as the main screen (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Spica: altitude 3.6°, azimuth 88.6°
  • Arcturus: altitude 6.4°, azimuth 54.2°
Test Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
Save file as img/stellarium/D2-L.jpg
D2-L – Spica above the Sphinx – 2000 years later. Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
D3-VAntares – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4580 BC (year −4579)
Time
Sun at −8°, the same solar longitude
View direction
east, same as the main screen (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Antares: altitude 43.4°, azimuth 114.2°
  • Shaula: altitude 26.8°, azimuth 120.0°
Test Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
Save file as img/stellarium/D3-V.jpg
D3-V – Antares – 2000 years earlier. Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
D3-LAntares – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
580 BC (year −579)
Time
Sun at −8°, the same solar longitude
View direction
east, same as the main screen (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Antares: altitude -10.0°, azimuth 103.9°
  • Shaula: altitude -25.5°, azimuth 111.9°
Test Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
Save file as img/stellarium/D3-L.jpg
D3-L – Antares – 2000 years later. Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
D4-VAltair and Deneb – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4580 BC (year −4579)
Time
Sun at −8°, the same solar longitude
View direction
east, same as the main screen (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Altair: altitude 56.0°, azimuth 106.9°
  • Deneb: altitude 32.2°, azimuth 62.1°
Test Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
Save file as img/stellarium/D4-V.jpg
D4-V – Altair and Deneb – 2000 years earlier. Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
D4-LAltair and Deneb – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
580 BC (year −579)
Time
Sun at −8°, the same solar longitude
View direction
east, same as the main screen (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Altair: altitude 10.1°, azimuth 89.2°
  • Deneb: altitude 8.3°, azimuth 50.4°
Test Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
Save file as img/stellarium/D4-L.jpg
D4-L – Altair and Deneb – 2000 years later. Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
D5-VHamal and Fomalhaut – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4579 BC (year −4578)
Time
Sun at −8°, the same solar longitude
View direction
east, same as the main screen (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Fomalhaut: altitude 19.1°, azimuth 182.6°
  • Hamal: altitude 13.2°, azimuth 109.3°
Test Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
Save file as img/stellarium/D5-V.jpg
D5-V – Hamal and Fomalhaut – 2000 years earlier. Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
D5-LHamal and Fomalhaut – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
579 BC (year −578)
Time
Sun at −8°, the same solar longitude
View direction
east, same as the main screen (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Fomalhaut: altitude -4.7°, azimuth 135.6°
  • Hamal: altitude -20.0°, azimuth 65.2°
Test Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
Save file as img/stellarium/D5-L.jpg
D5-L – Hamal and Fomalhaut – 2000 years later. Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
D6-VHamal above the Sphinx – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4579 BC (year −4578)
Time
Sun at −8°, the same solar longitude
View direction
east, same as the main screen (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Hamal: altitude 30.7°, azimuth 124.3°
  • Mirfak: altitude 31.8°, azimuth 88.7°
Test Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
Save file as img/stellarium/D6-V.jpg
D6-V – Hamal above the Sphinx – 2000 years earlier. Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
D6-LHamal above the Sphinx – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
579 BC (year −578)
Time
Sun at −8°, the same solar longitude
View direction
east, same as the main screen (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Hamal: altitude -1.0°, azimuth 78.1°
  • Mirfak: altitude 3.8°, azimuth 48.1°
Test Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.
Save file as img/stellarium/D6-L.jpg
D6-L – Hamal above the Sphinx – 2000 years later. Expectation: the stars are in a different place; the combination from the main screen no longer occurs.

11.4 Equinox and solstice: the shadow effect and the sunset as akhet

Test cardC
Claim
Seen from the Sphinx, the Sun sets at the summer solstice in the gap between Khufu and Khafre: the akhet sign.
Measurement and error
Sun at 298.5°; gap 287–310° (map ±1°).
Degrees of freedom
The viewpoint (the Sphinx) and the moment (sunset) are chosen.
Strongest counter-argument
A gap between two buildings arises by itself; the Sphinx is not a proven viewpoint.
Check
E1–E4 (all placed).

Two further effects: the shadow effect on the pyramid at sunrise (equinox) and the sunset in the akhet (summer solstice), the hieroglyph of the Sun between two hills that denotes the horizon.

Shadow at the spring equinox

At the equinox the Sun rises at azimuth 89.5° and the four faces of the Great Pyramid are aligned to the cardinal directions to within a few arcminutes. The Sun then shines almost exactly along the north and south faces. The Great Pyramid has concave faces (the so-called indentation): the faces are bent inwards in the middle, so that the strip of light is split in two halves. Such a split of light and shadow is reported by observers (not in the pdf sources). It cannot be seen in Stellarium, because Stellarium does not draw buildings; for this a photo or a 3D model is needed.

The eight-sided pyramid in raking light. Aerial photo taken straight from above. The shadow boundary bends in the middle of each face: the faces are bent inwards by a fraction along the apothem, so that the pyramid is eight-sided in cross-section. With a low Sun along a face this bend becomes visible as a split of light and shadow.

Sunset as akhet

The Egyptian name of the Great Pyramid was Akhet-Khufu, “horizon of Cheops”. Seen from the Sphinx, the Sun sets at the summer solstice exactly in the gap between Khufu and Khafre. That is the shape of the akhet sign, and it is also the start of the season Akhet, the season of the flood (11.2, K1).

IDMomentAzimuth of the setting SunLooking from the Sphinx: what stands thereOutcome
E2Equinox (autumn and spring)270,5°Khafre: azimuth 278°, extending over 269–287° (base width 18°, top width 12°)Sun sets along the southern flank of Khafre
E3Summer solstice298,5°Between Khafre (up to 287°) and Khufu (from 310°), centred on 298.5°Sun sets in the gap between Khufu and Khafre: the akhet sign
E4Winter solstice242,6°Menkaure: azimuth 248°, width 245–251°Sun sets just to the left of the small pyramid

Position of the Sphinx and the pyramids in degrees and metres from map coordinates (accuracy c. ±1°). Khufu lies 545 m from the Sphinx (azimuth 322°, altitude of the top 15°), Khafre 663 m (278°, 12°), Menkaure 995 m (248°, 4°).

What does the other side say? The builders did not stand at the position of the Sphinx as a fixed viewpoint; the Sphinx is older than the gap (or contemporary) and the pyramids served a different purpose. A gap between two mountains is a natural image that occurs in many places; what is special is only that here it falls at the most visible moment of the year.

Assessment C The sunset at 298.5°, in the middle of the gap, is a calculated fact: at the summer solstice the Sun sets exactly between Khufu and Khafre.

Source: Wikipedia: Cheops, pdf p. 3 Allen 2005, pdf p. 6 Allen 2005, pdf p. 7

Sun above the Sphinx around the summer solstice. The rising Sun above the head of the Sphinx, seen from behind the statue. At the summer solstice the Sun rises in the northeast (azimuth 61.5°) and at the equinox due east (89.5°); whether it stands exactly “above” the Sphinx depends on the position of the photographer. The summer solstice, two days before New Year, belongs with the akhet image alongside.
View from the Sphinx and causeway. The Sphinx and the pyramids of Khafre (left) and Khufu (right): the gap between them is the akhet.

Stellarium screenshots: shadow and akhet (E1–E4)

E1Shadow effect at the spring equinoxscreenshot missing
Date
12 April 2579 BC (Julian) / 22 March Gregorian
Time
sunrise (Sun −0.27°)
View direction
northeast, photo or 3D model of the Great Pyramid (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Sun at azimuth 89.5°
  • Split of light and shadow on the north and south faces
Test Place a photo or 3D render here with the Stellarium azimuth in the caption.
Save file as img/stellarium/E1.jpg
E1 – Shadow effect at the spring equinox. Place a photo or 3D render here with the Stellarium azimuth in the caption.
E2Sunset at the equinoxscreenshot missing
Date
13 October 2580 BC or 12 April 2579 BC
Time
Sun at −0.27°, evening (c. 18:00)
View direction
west (azimuth 270°), from the Sphinx (field of view c. 60°)
Expected in the image
  • Sun at azimuth 270.5°
  • Khafre’s flank at 269–287°
Test The Sun disappears behind the southern flank of Khafre, not into a gap.
Save file as img/stellarium/E2.jpg
E2 – Sunset at the equinox. The Sun disappears behind the southern flank of Khafre, not into a gap.
E3Sunset at the summer solstice: the akhetscreenshot missing
Date
15 July 2580 BC
Time
Sun at −0.27°, evening (c. 19:04)
View direction
west-northwest (azimuth 298°), from the Sphinx (field of view c. 60°)
Expected in the image
  • Sun at azimuth 298.5°
  • Khafre on the left (278°), Khufu on the right (322°): the Sun sets in the gap (298.5°)
Test The akhet image: sun between two mountains.
Save file as img/stellarium/E3.jpg
E3 – Sunset at the summer solstice: the akhet. The akhet image: sun between two mountains.
E4Sunset at the winter solsticescreenshot missing
Date
9 January 2579 BC
Time
Sun at −0.27°, evening (c. 17:05)
View direction
west-southwest (azimuth 243°) (field of view c. 60°)
Expected in the image
  • Sun at azimuth 242.6°
  • Menkaure at 245–251°
Test Compare the sunset near Menkaure with E3.
Save file as img/stellarium/E4.jpg
E4 – Sunset at the winter solstice. Compare the sunset near Menkaure with E3.

11.5 Two mornings in the Milky Way: life in May, death and the Nile in November

Test cardD
Claim
On 10 May and 8 November 2580 BC the Sun is reunited with the Milky Way. On those two mornings the sky shows the figures of life (May) and of death, the Nile and the new beginning (November), each with a counterpart in the north or south. In November the Sun also rises almost above the causeway.
Measurement and error
Sun at ecliptic longitude 26° and 206° (M5). Rising on 10 May c. 77°, on 8 November c. 102°; the causeway line lies at 104–105°, so 27° away in May and 2–3° in November (K3: 104.0° on 13 November). Sadalmelik c. 45.5° high against the southern shaft of 45°14′ (±0.5°, own calculation).
Degrees of freedom
The two dates are fixed by the Milky Way (M5), not by the figures. Which figure goes with which attribute is our choice; the figures come from the Stellarium sky culture.
Strongest counter-argument
Every morning sky contains dozens of figures; with so many figures a counterpart can be found for any attribute. Only the Thigh (Meskhetiu), Orion and Sirius are attested for the Old Kingdom; the rest is later or a modern choice.
Check
PT4 (four screenshots, 11.5b), M5 and K3. The control screens 2000 years earlier and later (-V/-L) still have to be made. The Sokar festival (26 Khoiak = 9 November) is a projection from the New Kingdom (E).

In 14.1 (M5) we saw that the Sun stands in the Milky Way again on two mornings of the year: 10 May and 8 November 2580 BC. Here we put those two mornings side by side and look at who is in the sky then. What stands out is that one morning shows the figures of life and the other those of death, the Nile and the new beginning, and that in both cases a counterpart in the north or south keeps the balance. On 8 November the Sun also rises almost above the causeway, the line that also carries the calendar of 11.2.

The images (11.5b) were made with Stellarium at Giza, shortly before sunrise, with the Egyptian sky culture switched on. The figures are therefore drawn as Stellarium shows them and remain an assumption (see the other side below). The table shows for each figure how firm the link with an Egyptian god is.

10 May: the life that is about to flourish

On 10 May the Sun rises at about 77°, 27° north of the causeway line (104°). This morning therefore does not belong to the calendar of 11.2; it is its counterpart. Venus and Jupiter stand close to the Sun. In the east, around the Sun, stand Taurus, Aries and Pisces, and below the horizon Osiris waits: Orion remains invisible until 19 June, Sothis until 17 July (14.1). These are figures that in the later Egyptian world of gods belong to growth and fertility: Apis and Hathor (Taurus), Khnum who forms living beings (Aries) and the fish as a sign of rebirth. It is also the moment when the year runs towards its beginning: the Nile is low, and in just over two months Sothis returns with the new year and the rising water (17 July, M2 in 14.1b).

In the south stands Aquarius, the figure of Hapy and the water. Sadalmelik (α Aquarii) then stands about 45.5° high at azimuth 197°. That is the altitude of the southern shaft of the King’s Chamber (45°13′40″, 12.1), 17° from the south and thus within the 25° that we use in 12.3 for stars off the meridian. Sadalsuud stands at 40.6°, 2° above the southern shaft of the Queen’s Chamber (38°28′). The Field, the square of Pegasus, stands higher (47° to 67°); in Stellarium it is called “Veld (Som.)”, so it is Sumerian and not an Egyptian figure. The rising water and the purifying waters of later temple scenes, in which the king is purified with water, belong in our reading to this place. The altitudes are our own calculation (Vondrák precession, ±0.5°) and must be measured in the image.

In the north stand the Guardian (Arcturus) upright and the fox on the Thigh of the Bull, the Meskhetiu or Foreleg. We read the fox as a jackal, Anubis, the god of embalming. The Falcon, Horus, still hangs at an angle above the horizon. In this image life stands in the east and south and death in the north: a balance.

8 November: death, the Nile and new life

Half a year later the roles are reversed. Osiris (Orion) and Sothis set in the west, into the Duat; in May they were below the horizon in the east. Scorpius (Selket, who watches and mourns over the dead) stands in the east near the Sun, and on 13 November (K3) Peret begins: the seed goes into the earth. In the south the Mother Goddess Isis sits exactly on the meridian, with the Milky Way behind her and Khenti Irti, Min-Pan, Anuket and Satis around her. Anuket and Satis belong to Elephantine, in the south where the Nile enters Egypt. That the Milky Way was a celestial Nile is a later and uncertain reading (E), but the position is striking: the river of the sky runs past the goddesses of the Nile. In the north the Falcon, Horus, stands upright and directly opposite Isis; the fox hangs upside down below the Thigh. Mother in the south and son in the north keep each other in balance, with death in the west and east and the river in between: the family of Osiris in four directions.

The causeway as a marker

On 8 November the Sun rises at about 102°, 2–3° north of the causeway line (104–105°). The Sun reaches the line itself, 104.0°, five days later, on 13 November (K3, ⅓ of the year, start of Peret). In M5 the Sun already stands at 105.00° at 06:42, exactly in the Milky Way. In the same week the causeway thus marks two things: the start of the season in the calendar of 11.2 and the morning on which the Sun enters the Milky Way again, while Isis, Horus, Osiris and Sothis take their places in the sky. That may be chance, but it may also be deliberate: the causeway would then be not only a calendar but also a sight line to this moment in the stars. The May morning has no marker at Giza that we know of; that counterpart can only be seen in the sky. It is therefore a reading, not proof.

The Sokar festival: 26 Khoiak

Sokar is the falcon god of the necropolis near Memphis. He is depicted as a mummified falcon, and his title “He of Rostau” refers to the entrances of the netherworld. His festival fell on the 26th day of the fourth month of Akhet (Khoiak), with preparations on the 25th. At the festival the earth was hacked up and cattle were driven, people wore garlands of onions and an image of the god sailed around on the henu bark, a boat with a prow in the shape of an oryx. Later, together with the Osiris festivals, it grew into the Khoiak festivals, which ended on the 30th with the raising of the djed pillar, the resurrection of Osiris. The Sokar festival itself is already known in the Early Dynastic period and appears in the festival lists of the Old Kingdom (the Palermo Stone, the calendar of the sun temple of Nyuserre and tombs at Giza and Saqqara). The date 26 Khoiak, however, is only recorded for the New Kingdom (the calendar of Ramesses III at Medinet Habu). For Khufu’s time it is a projection (level E).

With New Year on 17 July 2580 BC (I Akhet 1, see 11.2), 26 Khoiak is day 115 after New Year: 9 November (Julian; 19 October Gregorian). That falls in the middle of the week of the two mornings. Shifting by one day because of the change of day (sunrise or midnight) does not essentially change that picture.

Date (Julian, 2580 BC)Egyptian dayIn the skyIn the festivalLevel
8 November25 KhoiakThe Sun is reunited with the Milky Way (M5, PT4) and rises at about 102°.Day of preparation for the festival (New Kingdom).E
9 November26 KhoiakIn the night before, at 00:09, Orion, Kochab and Megrez stand on all four shafts at the same time (12.4).The Sokar festival: the henu bark, hacking up the earth, driving cattle.E
13 November30 KhoiakThe Sun rises above the causeway, 104.0° (K3, ⅓ of the year).Final day of the Khoiak festivals: the raising of the djed pillar (later source).E
14 November1 PeretStart of Peret, the sowing season (K3 and 11.2).The seed goes into the earth.D

In the image of 8 November the Falcon, Horus, stands upright in the north opposite Isis, while Osiris goes into the Duat in the west. Sokar is also a falcon: the god of the necropolis of Memphis, later merged with Osiris (Ptah-Sokar-Osiris). The festival belongs with hacking up the earth and sowing at the moment Peret begins; in the sky, the image of death in the east and west and life standing upright in the north fits it. The causeway would then mark not only the start of Peret (11.2) but also the close of the Khoiak festival. That the henu bark was dragged over Khafre’s causeway is our own idea: there is no text that says so (level E).

The Falcon in Stellarium is a choice of the sky culture and not a proven Sokar. The probability that a random date falls within five days of K3 is about 3%, but there are many festivals and many markers in the sky; that is why it remains level E. Sources: Wikipedia (Sokar), ANEFest (Festival of Sokar; Festivals of the Old Kingdom) and Bielesch 2011 (The Khoiak Festival). All known festivals are listed with their Julian date in 11.6.

MorningDirectionFigureEgyptian godAttributeLevel
10 MayEastTaurusApis (known in Memphis from the 1st dynasty), later son of Hathorstrength, fertility, kingshipD
10 MayEastAriesKhnum (part of the name Khnum-Khufu, 14.2)forms people and animals on his potter’s wheel: the creation of lifeE
10 MayEastPiscesthe Nile fish (younger sources only)rebirth and the rising waterE
10 MayEast, below the horizonOsiris (Orion) and Sothisin the Duat until 19 June and 17 July (14.1)waiting for the returnD
10 MaySouthAquariusHapy; in later temple scenes water purifies the kingflood and purification; Sadalmelik at the altitude of the southern shaftD
10 MayNorthGuardian and fox (jackal)Anubis, god of embalmingdeath and keeping watchE
10 MayNorthThigh of the Bullthe Foreleg (Meskhetiu), the imperishable starsdeath that does not perishD
10 MayNorthFalconHorusthe living king, the balance with deathD
8 NovemberEastScorpiusSelket (Serket)watches over and mourns the deadE
8 NovemberSouthMother Goddess IsisIsis (Sothis = Isis, 14.1)mother, mourning and new lifeD
8 NovemberSouthAnuket and SatisNile goddesses of Elephantinethe coming of the Nile and the floodD
8 NovemberSouthMin-Pan and Khenti IrtiMin; a form of HorusfertilityE
8 NovemberWestOsiris (Orion) and SothisOsiris, Isis-Sothisthe setting into the DuatD
8 NovemberNorthFalconHorus, upright opposite Isisthe heir: life and balanceD

Level: D = our interpretation of a figure from the Stellarium sky culture; E = speculation, the sources are younger than the Fourth Dynasty. The altitude of Sadalmelik comes from our calculation.

What does the other side say? (1) For the Old Kingdom only Sirius, Orion and the Great Bear (the Foreleg) are reliably established as constellations (11.3); Guardian, Min-Pan, Khenti Irti, Satis, Pisces, Aries and Aquarius are later or a choice of the maker of the sky culture. (2) Every morning sky contains dozens of figures; whoever has enough figures finds a counterpart for every attribute. That is why we take the figures as they appear in the image and add nothing. (3) The attributes of the gods come largely from later sources. (4) The May morning does not lie on the causeway, so the causeway marks only one of the two mornings. (5) The date of the Sokar festival (26 Khoiak) comes from the New Kingdom; for Khufu this projection cannot be checked.

Assessment D A coherence that we show, not proof: two mornings with the Sun in the Milky Way, one with the figures of life and the other with those of death, the Nile and Horus as counterweight, and the second on the causeway line. The test becomes stronger if the same two mornings 2000 years earlier and later (-V/-L) show the figures in other places.

Source: own calculation (Vondrák precession, sun according to Meeus) and Stellarium (Egyptian sky culture); see also 8.7, 11.2, 11.3, 12.1, 14.1 and 14.2.

Compass for the morning of 10 May 2580 BC: the Sun in the Milky Way with the figures of life in the east, Aquarius in the south and the counterweight of death in the north10 May 2580 BC: lifeGizaNSWENorth: counterweight to deathGuardian + fox (jackal) on the ThighFalcon (Horus) slanting above the horizonSouth: the waterAquarius (Hapy, purifying water)Sadalmelik 45.5° = southern shaftKing’s Chamber (45°14′)Field (Pegasus) higher: 47–67°Westnothing of thisstory in theskyEast: lifeTaurus, Aries, PiscesSun, Venus, JupiterOsiris below the horizon
10 May: life. Gold dot: the Sun at rising (c. 77°), far from the causeway line (red dashes, 104°). The water (Aquarius) stands in the south, death (Guardian and jackal) in the north.
Compass for the morning of 8 November 2580 BC: the Sun in the Milky Way above the causeway, Isis in the south, Osiris and Sothis setting in the west and the Falcon in the north8 November 2580 BC: death, Nile, lifeGizaNSWENorth: lifeFalcon (Horus) upright,opposite IsisSouth: Isis and the NileMother Goddess Isis on the meridian,Milky Way behind; Khenti Irti,Min-Pan, Anuket and SatisWest: deathOsiris and Sothisset, into theDuatEast: deathScorpius (Selket)Sun ±102°, at thecauseway (104°)
8 November: death, Nile and life. Gold dot: the Sun at rising (c. 102°), 2–3° from the causeway line (red dashes, 104°). Isis in the south, the Falcon in the north; Osiris and Sothis set in the west.

Stellarium screenshots: two mornings in the Milky Way (PT4)

PT4 May north10 May: Guardian, fox, Thigh and Falconscreenshot missing
Date
10 May 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
shortly before sunrise (Sun c. −5°), turn on the Egyptian sky culture
View direction
north (field of view c. 143°)
Expected in the image
  • Guardian (Arcturus) upright in the northwest, the fox on the Thigh of the Bull
  • The Falcon at an angle above the northern horizon
  • On the right Taurus in the east, near the Sun
Test Does the counterweight of death (Guardian, fox, Thigh) stand in the north, opposite the figures of life in the east?
Save file as img/stellarium/pt4-sun-in-milkyway-high-hathor-north.jpg
PT4 May north – 10 May: Guardian, fox, Thigh and Falcon. The Guardian stands upright, the fox stands on the Thigh of the Bull (Meskhetiu) and the Falcon (Horus) hangs at an angle above the horizon; at the far right Taurus rises near the Sun.
PT4 May south10 May: Aquarius, Pisces, Aries and Taurusscreenshot missing
Date
10 May 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
shortly before sunrise (Sun c. −5°), turn on the Egyptian sky culture
View direction
south (field of view c. 168°)
Expected in the image
  • Aquarius above the south; Sadalmelik c. 45.5° high at azimuth c. 197°
  • Pisces, Aries and Taurus from the south to the east
  • The Field (Pegasus, “Som.”) higher than Aquarius, the Milky Way in the west and northeast
Test Does Aquarius stand at the altitude of the southern shaft of the King’s Chamber (45°14′)? Measure the altitude of Sadalmelik in the image.
Save file as img/stellarium/pt4-sun-in-milkyway-high-hathor-south.jpg
PT4 May south – 10 May: Aquarius, Pisces, Aries and Taurus. Aquarius in the south with Sadalmelik at c. 45.5° (the altitude of the King’s Chamber southern shaft, own calculation), to the left Pisces, Aries and Taurus towards the east. The Field is Sumerian and stands higher.
PT4 November north8 November: Falcon upright opposite Isisscreenshot missing
Date
8 November 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
shortly before sunrise (Sun c. −3°), turn on the Egyptian sky culture
View direction
north (field of view c. 143°)
Expected in the image
  • The Falcon upright in the north
  • The Guardian and the fox upside down near the Thigh
  • On the right Scorpius and the Sun in the east
Test Does the Falcon (Horus) stand directly opposite Isis in the south?
Save file as img/stellarium/pt4-sun-in-milkyway-low-serket-north.jpg
PT4 November north – 8 November: Falcon upright opposite Isis. Now the Falcon (Horus) stands upright in the north, opposite Isis in the south; the Guardian and the fox are upside down and on the right, in the east, stand Scorpius and the Sun.
PT4 November south8 November: Isis, the Nile goddesses and Osirisscreenshot missing
Date
8 November 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
shortly before sunrise (Sun c. −3°), turn on the Egyptian sky culture
View direction
south (field of view c. 143°)
Expected in the image
  • Mother Goddess Isis on the meridian (azimuth 180°) with the Milky Way behind her
  • On the left Scorpius, Khenti Irti and Min-Pan; on the right Anuket, Satis and Osiris
  • Osiris and Sothis (Sirius) close to the western horizon
Test Do Osiris and Sothis set in the west while the Sun stands in the east near the Milky Way and the causeway direction (104–105°)?
Save file as img/stellarium/pt4-sun-in-milkyway-low-serket-south.jpg
PT4 November south – 8 November: Isis, the Nile goddesses and Osiris. Isis in the south, with Anuket and Satis (Elephantine) beside her and the Milky Way behind. Osiris and Sothis set in the west, Scorpius stands in the east near the Sun.

11.6 Festival calendar: the Egyptian festivals on our sky

Test cardE
Claim
The known festivals of the civil calendar can be placed on the Julian dates of 2580 BC. For five of them (Osiris procession, Hathor, Sokar, Renenutet, Min) the night sky in Stellarium shows a figure on the meridian or on the horizon that suits the festival.
Measurement and error
New Year (I Akhet 1) falls on 17 July 2580 BC (M2); each month has 30 days and there are five extra days. Each festival follows from its day number: 26 Khoiak is 115 days after New Year, so 9 November. The star positions are calculated; the festival dates are not: they come from the New Kingdom (Medinet Habu, Ramesses III).
Degrees of freedom
Which festivals we show, which moment we choose (shortly after midnight, in the night before the festival day) and which source we follow when the sources differ (Sokar, Min).
Strongest counter-argument
The days are more than 1400 years younger than Khufu. The Old Kingdom does name the festivals (the calendar of the sun temple of Nyuserre and tomb inscriptions), but gives no day. With thirteen festivals and dozens of figures in the sky, a matching pair can moreover always be found.
Check
Eight screenshots (FST1, 11.6b) for five festivals; New Year and the solar points are in M2 and 11.2, 9 November also in 12.4. Control screens 2000 years earlier and later (-V/-L) are still missing.

Up to here we have looked at separate dates: New Year, the solar points, the two mornings in the Milky Way and the Sokar festival. The Egyptians also had a whole festival year, ordered on their civil calendar of twelve months of thirty days with five extra days. Here we put the known festivals on that calendar and convert them to the Julian dates of 2580 BC, the dates that are set in Stellarium. In this way the sky of that moment can be viewed for each festival.

The days of the festivals come from the New Kingdom, mainly from the calendar of Ramesses III at Medinet Habu. The festival lists of the Old Kingdom name New Year, the Wag and Thoth festivals, the Sadj festival, the Sokar festival and the coming of Min, but give no days. We therefore assume that the festivals kept their place on the civil calendar. That is a projection of more than fourteen hundred years and remains level E. Anyone who dates a festival differently can apply the rule themselves: day number from New Year, counting from 17 July.

For five festivals the last column shows a thumbnail of the screenshot; click it for the large image. All images with descriptions are below the table (11.6b). They were taken shortly after midnight local time, in the night before the festival day, because the Egyptian day began at sunrise. In this way the Sokar image connects with 11.5, where the morning of 8 November turned out to be the day of preparation for the Sokar festival. All images were made with the Egyptian sky culture switched on.

Civil dateJulian (Stellarium, 2580 BC)FestivalWhat was doneLevelImage
Epagomenal days 1–512–16 JulyBirthdays of the five children of NutOsiris, Horus the Elder, Seth, Isis and Nephthys; the five extra days outside the twelve months (4.3).E—
I Akhet 117 JulyWepet-renpet, the opening of the year (named in the Old Kingdom)New Year and, according to the New Kingdom, the “birthday of Ra-Horakhty”. Sirius rises again after c. 70 days and the flood begins (M2, 14.1).D—
I Akhet 1531 JulyOfferings to Hapy and AmunSecuring a good flood.E—
I Akhet 17–192–4 AugustWag festival; on the 19th together with the Thoth festival (both named in the Old Kingdom)Festival of remembrance with offerings for the dead.E—
I Akhet 205 AugustTekhThe “festival of drunkenness”.E—
I Akhet 227 AugustGreat procession of OsirisProcession of the god Osiris.E
II Akhet 15–2730 August – 11 SeptemberOpet festivalEleven days of festival for Amun at Luxor; mainly Thebes, of little relevance for Giza.E—
IV Akhet 115 OctoberHathor festivalThe Hathor voyage (calendar of Ramesses III). The autumn equinox falls two days earlier (K2, 13 October; PT3 in 14.2c).E
IV Akhet 18–30, with 26 Khoiak1–13 November, with 9 NovemberKhoiak festivals and Sokar festival (Sokar named in the Old Kingdom)Osiris festivals with ploughing and sowing; on the 26th the henu bark of Sokar, on the 30th the raising of the djed pillar. See 11.5. One source gives IV Akhet 11 (25 October) for Sokar.E
I Peret 114 NovemberNehebkau festivalThe “beginning of eternity”; start of Peret, the sowing season (11.2).E—
IV Peret 25–278–10 MarchRenenutet festivalsHarvest and offerings for the granaries. On 9 March (IV Peret 26) the Sun rises above the causeway for the second time (K5, 11.2).E
I Shemu 114 MarchRenenutet, the birthday of the grain goddess; start of ShemuThe start of the harvest season. In 11.2 day 240 is counted from the solstice (15 July) and counts as the second causeway day (K5, 9 March); counted from New Year (17 July), I Shemu 1 falls two days later, on 14 March.E—
I Shemu 1124 MarchMin festival, “the coming of Min” (named in the Old Kingdom)A four-day festival at new moon for Min, the god of fertility. Another source gives III Akhet 15 (29 September); we take I Shemu 11.E

How to read the table: on the left is the date on the civil calendar, next to it the same day in the Julian year −2579, as Stellarium shows it. The level refers to the festival date (E) and not to the star positions, which are calculated. The last column shows a thumbnail of the night sky for the festival, for each festival in north and south directions where both were made; the large images with descriptions are below the table.

What stands out: in the night of the Sokar festival, the Osiris festival of Khoiak, Osiris himself (Orion) stands on the meridian, with the belt at about 45°, the angle of the King’s Chamber southern shaft (12.4). At the Osiris procession Orion is just rising. At the Hathor festival Taurus, in 14.2 Hathor/Apis, stands on the meridian. At the grain festivals of Renenutet Spica, the “ear of grain”, stands on the meridian, and at the Min festival Min-Pan stands low in the south. These are nice coincidences, but we did not designate the figures in advance, and with thirteen festivals something always fits. The names Spica and Min-Pan are Stellarium’s and are not attested for the Old Kingdom.

Sources for the festivals and days: UCL Digital Egypt (Festival dates), Ancient Egypt Online (Festival calendar), ANEFest (Festivals of the epoch of the Old Kingdom) and for Sokar Bielesch 2011 (The Khoiak Festival). The sources differ for Sokar (IV Akhet 11, 26 or 18–30) and for Min (I Shemu 11 or III Akhet 15). The conversion to Julian dates follows from New Year on 17 July 2580 BC (M2).

Stellarium screenshots: the festival nights (FST1)

For each festival the night sky in the night before the festival day, shortly after midnight local time, with the Egyptian sky culture switched on. Where there are two images, one looks north and the other south (or east).

I Akhet 22 · 7 August: Great procession of Osiris
FST1 Osiris procession eastI Akhet 22: Osiris risesscreenshot missing
Date
7 August 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian)
Time
00:36 local time, the night before the festival (the Egyptian day begins at sunrise)
View direction
east to south (field of view c. 143°)
Expected in the image
  • King Osiris (Orion) just on the eastern horizon, around azimuth 90–105°
  • Aldebaran (Taurus) already c. 20° high at azimuth 105°
  • Aries, Pisces and the Field (Som.) towards the south
Test Does Osiris (Orion) rise just above the eastern horizon in the night of the Osiris procession, while Taurus is already high?
Save file as img/stellarium/fst1-procession-osiris-e-0u.jpg
FST1 Osiris procession east – I Akhet 22: Osiris rises. Osiris (Orion) is still on the eastern horizon; Aldebaran in Taurus is already c. 20° high (azimuth 105°), behind it Aries, Pisces and the Field (Som.). The Sun is at −37°.
FST1 Osiris procession northI Akhet 22: the northern skyscreenshot missing
Date
7 August 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian)
Time
00:36 local time, the night before the festival (the Egyptian day begins at sunrise)
View direction
north (field of view c. 143°)
Expected in the image
  • Guardian (Arcturus), the fox and the Thigh of the Bull in the north and northwest
  • The Falcon and the Goat (Capella) above the northern horizon
  • King Osiris at the eastern edge, on the horizon
Test Does Osiris then stand at the eastern edge of the northern sky, at the moment the Guardian, the fox and the Thigh stand in the north?
Save file as img/stellarium/fst1-procession-osiris-n-0u.jpg
FST1 Osiris procession north – I Akhet 22: the northern sky. The same night looking north: the Guardian, the fox on the Thigh of the Bull, the Falcon and the Goat. Osiris (Orion) rises at the eastern edge.
IV Akhet 1 · 15 October: Hathor festival
FST1 Hathor southIV Akhet 1: Taurus on the meridianscreenshot missing
Date
15 October 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian)
Time
00:25 local time, the night before the festival (the Egyptian day begins at sunrise)
View direction
south (field of view c. 102°)
Expected in the image
  • Aldebaran (Taurus) on the meridian (azimuth 180°) at c. 57°
  • King Osiris (Orion) left of the meridian, the Hathor Cow to the upper left of Taurus
  • Aries, Pisces and the Field (Som.) on the right
Test Does Taurus, the constellation that belongs to Hathor/Apis in 14.2, stand on the meridian in the night of the Hathor festival?
Save file as img/stellarium/fst1-hathor-fst-s-0u.jpg
FST1 Hathor south – IV Akhet 1: Taurus on the meridian. Aldebaran, the eye of the Bull, stands on the meridian at c. 57° altitude. To the left of Taurus stands the Hathor Cow, to the right Aries, Pisces and the Field (Som.); Osiris (Orion) stands left of the south point.
26 Khoiak · 9 November: Sokar festival
FST1 Sokar south26 Khoiak: Osiris on the meridianscreenshot missing
Date
9 November 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian)
Time
00:13 local time, the night before the festival (the Egyptian day begins at sunrise)
View direction
south (field of view c. 143°)
Expected in the image
  • King Osiris (Orion) on the meridian; the belt (Alnitak) c. 44.6° high at azimuth 180°
  • Taurus, Aries and the Field (Som.) above the southeast to southwest
  • Hathor Cow, Satis, Anuket, Canopus and the Babylonian Rooster below the ecliptic
Test Does Orion’s belt (Osiris) stand on the meridian in the night of the Sokar festival, at about the angle of the King’s Chamber southern shaft (45°14′)?
Save file as img/stellarium/fst1-sokar-fst-s-0u.jpg
FST1 Sokar south – 26 Khoiak: Osiris on the meridian. Osiris (Orion) stands on the meridian, with Alnitak at c. 44.6° altitude: close to the angle of the King’s Chamber southern shaft (45°14′, 12.4). It is the night of the Osiris festival of Khoiak.
IV Peret 25 · 7 March: Renenutet festivals
FST1 Renenutet northIV Peret 25: the northern skyscreenshot missing
Date
7 March 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian)
Time
23:55 local time, the night before the festival (the Egyptian day begins at sunrise)
View direction
north (field of view c. 121°)
Expected in the image
  • The Falcon low above the north point, the Guardian and the Thigh of the Bull beside it
  • Leo (with Berenice) on the left, in the northwest
  • The Eagle on the eastern horizon
Test Does the northern sky in the night of the Renenutet festivals look different from November and August?
Save file as img/stellarium/fst1-renenutet-n-0u.jpg
FST1 Renenutet north – IV Peret 25: the northern sky. The Falcon stands low near the north point, the Guardian and the Thigh of the Bull beside it; on the left Leo with Berenice, on the right the Eagle on the horizon.
FST1 Renenutet southIV Peret 25: Spica on the meridianscreenshot missing
Date
7 March 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian)
Time
23:55 local time, the night before the festival (the Egyptian day begins at sunrise)
View direction
south (field of view c. 121°)
Expected in the image
  • Spica (“ear of grain”, Virgo) on the meridian at c. 73°
  • Libra, Min-Pan, Khenti Irti, Mother Goddess Isis and Anuket towards the south and southwest
  • The Milky Way at lower left, near Sagittarius and Scorpius
Test Does Spica, the “ear of grain” of Virgo, stand on the meridian in the night of Renenutet’s harvest and granary festivals?
Save file as img/stellarium/fst1-renenutet-s-0u.jpg
FST1 Renenutet south – IV Peret 25: Spica on the meridian. Spica (the “ear of grain”) in Virgo stands on the meridian at c. 73° altitude, in the night before the festivals of the granaries. The name is the ordinary astronomical name and not an Egyptian one.
I Shemu 11 · 23 March: Min festival
FST1 Min northI Shemu 11: the northern skyscreenshot missing
Date
23 March 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian)
Time
23:28 local time, the night before the festival (the Egyptian day begins at sunrise)
View direction
north (field of view c. 121°)
Expected in the image
  • The Falcon low near the north point, the Guardian and the Thigh of the Bull beside it
  • Leo with Berenice and Horus the Red (Mars) in the northwest
  • The Eagle on the right on the eastern horizon
Test How does the northern sky in the night of the Min festival compare with the night of the Renenutet festivals, sixteen days earlier?
Save file as img/stellarium/fst1-min-fst-n-0u.jpg
FST1 Min north – I Shemu 11: the northern sky. The northern sky on 23 March: the Falcon low near the north point, the Guardian and the Thigh of the Bull, on the left Leo with Berenice and Horus the Red, on the right the Eagle.
FST1 Min southI Shemu 11: Min-Pan on the meridianscreenshot missing
Date
23 March 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian)
Time
23:28 local time, the night before the festival (the Egyptian day begins at sunrise)
View direction
south (field of view c. 121°)
Expected in the image
  • Hadar (β Cen) and Min-Pan on the meridian (azimuth 180°) at c. 24°
  • Khenti Irti beside them, Scorpius on the left, Mother Goddess Isis and Anuket on the right
  • Libra and Virgo above the southern sky
Test Does Min-Pan, the figure that Stellarium draws for Min, stand low on the meridian in the night of the Min festival?
Save file as img/stellarium/fst1-min-fst-s-0u.jpg
FST1 Min south – I Shemu 11: Min-Pan on the meridian. Min-Pan stands on the meridian with Hadar (β Cen), c. 24° high, next to Khenti Irti. On the left Scorpius, on the right Mother Goddess Isis and Anuket. Min-Pan is the name of the figure in the Stellarium sky culture.

Chapter 12 The shafts

Four narrow shafts run upwards at fixed angles from the King’s Chamber and the Queen’s Chamber. Using Petrie’s measurements we calculate which stars stood there and when.

12.1 The shafts: which stars fit Petrie’s angles?

Test cardC
Claim
Of 33 stars chosen in advance (everything that researchers and this book link with the sky above Giza), only in Khufu’s century do three stand on Petrie’s shaft angles at the same time: Orion, Sirius or Saiph, and Thuban.
Measurement and error
In 2580 BC: Mintaka +0.14°, Alnilam −0.36°, Sirius +0.47°, Saiph −0.44°, Thuban −0.34°. Three shafts filled (±0.5°): 2608–2432 BC and briefly in 3740–3660 BC; four never. Off the meridian (azimuth within 25°), at the same moment: all four at ±0.3° only in 2460–2388 BC.
Degrees of freedom
Small: the list of 33 stars was fixed before the calculation and every star was tested on every shaft; for each star it is stated who links it.
Strongest counter-argument
The shafts are not straight (Petrie: the slope changes further out) and were closed at both ends; the northern shaft of the Queen’s Chamber fits no star at all on the meridian.
Check
SH1–SH8 with controls -V/-L; graphs with the altitude per year and with all 33 stars, on and off the meridian; Mizar at both northern shafts.

The four shafts from the King’s Chamber and the Queen’s Chamber run upwards at a fixed angle. We use the measurements of Petrie (1883): King’s Chamber south 45°14′, King’s Chamber north 31°33′, Queen’s Chamber south 38°28′ and Queen’s Chamber north 37°28′ Petrie 1883, §44 Petrie 1883, §56. Not because they are more precise than later measurements (the shafts are not straight over their length), but because Petrie measured on site with one fixed method. Which stars fit them?

ShaftAngle (Petrie)Star (upper transit)Altitude in 2580 BCDifferenceYear in which the star reaches the angle exactly
King’s Chamber south45°14′ (45,23°)Mintaka (δ Ori)45,36°+0,14°2606 BC
Alnilam (ε Ori)44,87°−0,36°2508 BC
Alnitak (ζ Ori)44,58°−0,65°2447 BC
Queen’s Chamber south38°28′ (38,47°)Sirius (α CMa)38,94°+0,47°2725 BC
King’s Chamber north31°33′ (31,55°)Thuban (α Dra)31,21°−0,34°2519 BC and 3076 BC
Queen’s Chamber north37°28′ (37,47°)Kochab (β UMi)39,81°+2,34°1819 BC
5 Dra (κ Dra)39,06°+1,60°2261 BC

Altitude at upper transit through the meridian (southern shafts above the south, northern shafts above the north), 29.975° N, geometric, without refraction. Precession according to Vondrák (2011), proper motion from the Bright Star Catalogue. Thuban reaches the angle twice, because around 2800 BC it stood almost exactly on the pole and then turned away again.

What stands out?

  • The three datable shafts together point to the time of Khufu. Mintaka reaches the southern angle in 2606 BC, Sirius the angle of the Queen’s Chamber in 2725 BC and Thuban the northern angle in 2519 BC. Each on its own is off by decades; together all three are within 0.5° in the years 2608–2572 BC, at the beginning of Khufu’s reign (c. 2589–2566). The smallest combined deviation falls in 2584 BC.
  • Thuban gets a role. With the Upuaut angle of 32.5° Thuban only fitted in 2356 BC. With Petrie’s 31°33′ the pole star of the time stands almost exactly on the angle of the King’s Chamber northern shaft in the time of Khufu (−0.34°).
  • Sirius fits better. With 39.5° Sirius only reached the angle in 2405 BC; with Petrie’s 38°28′ that is 2725 BC, and in 2580 BC it stands 0.47° above it.
  • Orion’s knee fits too. Saiph (κ Ori), the star at Orion’s foot, reaches the angle of the Queen’s Chamber southern shaft in 2486 BC and stands 0.44° below it in 2580 BC. With Sirius (until 2572) and then Saiph (from 2594) that shaft is filled throughout the 26th century: Isis and Osiris take turns.
  • The northern shaft of the Queen’s Chamber drops out. At 37°28′ no bright star stands on the meridian in the 3rd millennium BC: Kochab is 2.3° and 5 Dra 1.6° too high. 5 Dra, which kept coming into view with the Upuaut angle of 39.1°, thus drops out of the hits. According to all measurements this shaft has a bend; Petrie only measured the lower part.

And if Petrie’s own correction is right? Petrie writes that the average slope over the whole length is probably not greater than 31° and 44½°. With those angles the belt reaches the southern angle between 2749 (Mintaka) and 2596 BC (Alnitak), and Thuban the northern angle in 2617 BC. Then too both shafts point to the century of Sneferu and Khufu.

The broad test: 33 stars, four shafts

So as not to look only at the stars that suit us, we fixed a broad list before calculating: every star that other researchers link with the shafts or the orientation (Trimble and Badawy 1964, Bauval 1993, Spence 2000), all stars of Orion (Osiris), the seven stars of the Great Bear (the Foreleg), the northern stars from a first exploration of this research and every other star that appears elsewhere in this book. Together 33 stars. Every star was tested on every shaft on its side of the sky. Only then do we look at which hypothesis fits.

StarWho links this star (or where it appears)Year in which the star reaches a shaft angle exactly (4500–500 BC)Difference in 2580 BC (nearest shaft)Off the meridian: at the shaft altitude (±0.5°, azimuth within 25°), 4500–500 BC
AlnitakTrimble 1964, Badawy 1964, Bauval 1993KS: 2447 BC; QS: 3750 BC−0.65° (KS)KS: 2548–1610 BC; QS: 3838–2936 BC
AlnilamTrimble 1964, Badawy 1964 (belt)KS: 2508 BC; QS: 3792 BC−0.36° (KS)KS: 2606–1694 BC; QS: 3880–2988 BC
MintakaTrimble 1964, Badawy 1964 (belt)KS: 2606 BC; QS: 3870 BC+0.14° (KS)KS: 2700–1814 BC; QS: 3956–3074 BC
SiriusBadawy 1964, Bauval 1993QS: 2725 BC+0.47° (QS)QS: 2862–1026 BC
BetelgeuseOrion = Osiris (Allen 2005)KS: 4327 BC+9.35° (KS)KS: 4414–3640 BC
RigelOrion = Osiris (Allen 2005)KS: 630 BC; QS: 2174 BC−2.03° (QS)KS: from 758 BC; QS: 2274–1234 BC
BellatrixOrion = Osiris (Allen 2005)KS: 3652 BC+5.82° (KS)KS: 3740–2958 BC; QS: until 4086 BC
SaiphOrion = Osiris (Allen 2005)KS: 789 BC; QS: 2486 BC−0.44° (QS)KS: from 936 BC; QS: 2590–1470 BC
AntaresScorpius/Selket (14.2)KS: 1016 BC+8.53° (KS)KS: 1736–920 BC; QS: from 528 BC
ThubanTrimble 1964, Badawy 1964, Bauval 1993KN: 3076 BC, 2519 BC; QN: 4126 BC, 1464 BC−0.34° (KN)KN: until 2988; from 2608 BC; QN: until 4038; from 1554 BC
KochabBauval 1993, Spence 2000QN: 1819 BC+2.34° (QN)KN: the whole period; QN: until 1578; from 544 BC
5 Drafirst explorationQN: 2261 BC+1.60° (QN)KN: the whole period; QN: until 2156 BC
Edasichfirst explorationQN: 3631 BC+4.39° (QN)KN: the whole period; QN: from 3770 BC
AldebaranTaurus (14.2)—+12.11° (KS)KS: until 4058 BC
PherkadLittle Bear; New Year (12.2)—+2.33° (QN)KN: the whole period; QN: the whole period
PolarisLittle Bear (later pole star)—+17.85° (QN)KN: from 1822 BC; QN: from 1942 BC
DubheGreat Bear = the Foreleg (Allen 2005)—+11.71° (QN)KN: from 3154 BC; QN: from 3290 BC
MerakGreat Bear—+15.32° (QN)KN: 1826–1234 BC; QN: 2278–780 BC
PhecdaGreat Bear—+11.92° (QN)KN: 3596–1036 BC; QN: 3778–854 BC
MegrezGreat Bear—+7.40° (QN)KN: the whole period; QN: the whole period
AliothGreat Bear—+4.80° (QN)KN: the whole period; QN: the whole period
MizarSpence 2000 (plumb line with Kochab); Great Bear—+3.81° (QN)KN: the whole period; QN: the whole period
AlkaidGreat Bear—+8.61° (QN)KN: until 1528 BC; QN: until 1414 BC
Aldhibahfirst exploration—+11.77° (QN)KN: the whole period; QN: the whole period
No shaft at all in 4500–500 BC, not even off the meridiansee chapters 11 and 14Procyon (+19.11° relative to KS), Acrab (+16.28° relative to KS), Regulus (+38.95° relative to KS), Spica (+28.05° relative to KS), Fomalhaut (−22.86° relative to QS), Vega (+39.63° relative to QN), Deneb (+46.26° relative to QN), Capella (+43.05° relative to KS), Arcturus (+36.33° relative to QN)——

KS = King’s Chamber south (45°14′), QS = Queen’s Chamber south (38°28′), KN = King’s Chamber north (31°33′), QN = Queen’s Chamber north (37°28′). Every star was tested on the shafts on the side of the sky where it crosses the meridian. In bold: stars that reach a shaft between 2750 and 2400 BC, and Mizar. The last column also counts stars that do not stand directly above the shaft: they reach the altitude of the shaft somewhere within 25° of the shaft direction, as with the star clock (12.3).

What the last column shows: on the meridian the King’s Chamber northern shaft has only one star (Thuban), because at 31°33′ only a star close to the pole can stand due north. Off the meridian, 14 of the 33 stars reach that altitude, including Kochab, Pherkad, five stars of the Great Bear and Mizar, most of them throughout the period. On the meridian Mizar never reaches a northern shaft (at best 2.5° above the Queen’s Chamber northern angle, in 3385 BC), but off the meridian it reaches the altitude of both northern shafts once a day from 4500 to 500 BC. So off the meridian, a star at the altitude of a northern shaft says nothing about the year; only the moment at which all shafts have a star at the same time can do that (13.3).

Which star stands on which shaft and when? Margin ±1°, as we investigate the shafts. For each star chosen in advance, a dark bar in the centuries in which it stands within 1° of a shaft angle at its meridian transit, and a light bar in which it reaches the shaft altitude off the meridian (azimuth within 25°). 24 of the 33 stars reach a shaft; the other nine are listed below the graph. Mizar appears at both northern shafts. Top: how many shafts have a star, on the meridian and off the meridian at the same moment. Gold: the reign of Khufu.

What the broad test shows. From 4500 to 500 BC three of the four shafts have a star at the same time (±0.5°) in only two periods: 2608–2432 BC (Orion’s belt, Sirius or Saiph, and Thuban) and a short window in 3740–3660 BC (Bellatrix, the belt in the Queen’s Chamber southern shaft and Edasich). All four at the same time does not occur at ±0.5° in the whole precession cycle; at ±1° only in 2464–2342 BC. So the point stands, even if we include all the stars examined: together the shafts point to Khufu’s century, and above all to Orion.

And off the meridian? If we count all stars that reach the altitude of a shaft, the northern shafts almost always have a star, and in 67% of the years two shafts are filled at the same moment (±0.5°). All four at the same moment remains rare: at ±0.3° only in 2460–2388 BC in the whole cycle (the belt, Saiph, Kochab and Phecda or Megrez), at ±0.5° in six periods, the longest of which is 2546–2264 BC. In Khufu’s reign itself there are three at once; four from 2546 BC (at ±1° already in 2580 BC, see the star clock in 12.3). The details are in 13.3.

How wide is such a window?

Shaft and starMargin ±0.3°Margin ±0.5°Margin ±1°Off the meridian ±0.5° (4500–500 BC)
King’s Chamber south – Orion’s belt2665–2386 BC2705–2344 BC2802–2239 BC2700–1610 BC
Queen’s Chamber south – Sirius2815–2634 BC2873–2572 BC3017–2411 BC2862–1026 BC
Queen’s Chamber south – Saiph (Orion)2550–2421 BC2593–2378 BC2699–2267 BC2590–1470 BC
King’s Chamber north – Thuban3129–3023 and 2572–2467 BC3164–2988 and 2608–2431 BC3253–2899 and 2697–2342 BCuntil 2988; from 2608 BC
Queen’s Chamber north – Kochab1938–1684 BC2011–1578 BC2181 BC–AD 65until 1578; from 544 BC
Orion, Sirius and Thuban togethernever2608–2572 BC2697–2411 BC—
Orion (belt or Saiph), Sirius and Thuban2550–2467 BC2608–2431 BC2697–2342 BC—
King’s Chamber north – Kochabneverneverneverthe whole period
King’s Chamber north – Mizarneverneverneverthe whole period
Queen’s Chamber north – Mizarneverneverneverthe whole period
All four at the same time, any star from the listnever (meridian)never (meridian)2464–2342 BC (meridian)2546–2264 BC, at the same moment (and briefly in 3552–3526, 3238–3086 and 2226–2190 BC)

Only the windows from the 4th millennium BC onwards. In the entire precession cycle of 26,000 years the combinations on the meridian occur only in this one period (13.3). The last column: the star reaches the altitude of the shaft off the meridian, within 25° of the shaft direction. Off the meridian Kochab and Mizar reach the King’s Chamber northern shaft throughout the period; on the meridian never. All four at the same time at ±0.3°, off the meridian: only 2460–2388 BC.

Explanation: on the meridian a window is a few centuries wide and moves with precession; off the meridian a window for a southern star becomes two to four times as wide, and for a northern star often thousands of years. That is why the meridian remains the test that can date. Off the meridian, only the moment at which all four shafts have a star at the same time gives a date.

What does the other side say?

  • Shafts are not telescopes. They were closed at both ends (the Queen’s Chamber shafts with small stone doors, the King’s Chamber shafts by the casing) and their slope changes along their length. An angle is then a design choice, not a sight line. That is a perfectly good reading: the builders may have chosen the angle to match the altitude of a star, without anyone ever looking through it.
  • Choice of star. Hence the broad test above: 33 stars, fixed in advance. With random bright stars two shafts are often filled at the same time (13.3), but three at once only in the two periods mentioned.
  • Measurement differences. Petrie and the robot Upuaut differ by up to 1° (King’s Chamber north 31.55° versus 32.5°; Queen’s Chamber 38.5° versus 39.5°). Each degree shifts a date by 100 to 250 years. The finding above therefore depends on the choice of Petrie.
  • Windows, not dates. A star changes its altitude by only c. 0.005° per year. Even with Petrie’s angles a shaft dates to within decades, not to a single year.

Source: Petrie 1883, §44 · Petrie 1883, §56 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 43 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 59 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 118

Altitude of the shaft stars per year. For each shaft the altitude at meridian transit of all stars from the list of 33 that come within 2.5° of the angle, 3500–1500 BC; Mizar (dashed) at both northern shafts. The grey band is Petrie’s angle ±0.5°; gold is the reign of Khufu.
Three and four shafts at the same time. For each shaft the best-fitting star from the list of 33 (on the meridian), and per year the largest deviation of the best three and of all four. Top: the whole precession cycle; bottom: 3300–1800 BC, with the old test (Orion, Sirius, Thuban) dotted.
How to read the graphs

Where a line crosses the grey band, that star stands on the angle of the shaft. With all stars from the list included there are more crossings (Rigel and Saiph in the Queen’s Chamber southern shaft, 5 Dra in the northern shaft), but three shafts within half a degree only remain around 2608–2432 BC. The best three fit together in 2504 BC (Alnilam, Saiph and Thuban, all within 0.09°); on the meridian all four never come closer than 0.68° (2400 BC). Mizar (dashed line) remains 2.5° or more above the northern shafts on the meridian. The northern shaft of the Queen’s Chamber is reached on the meridian by 5 Dra (2363–2155 BC) and afterwards by Kochab.

B12-1Cross-section with the stars on Petrie’s anglesimage still to find

What it should show the same cross-section as B7-1, but now with the star lines: Orion’s belt above the King’s Chamber southern shaft (45°14′), Sirius above the Queen’s Chamber southern shaft (38°28′) and Thuban above the King’s Chamber northern shaft (31°33′); the northern shaft of the Queen’s Chamber (37°28′) without a star.

Why here the old diagram with 45° / 32.5° / 39.5° / 39.5° and “any circumpolar star” no longer fits Petrie’s measurements.

Search term Great Pyramid shafts Orion Sirius Thuban diagram
Save as img/jpg/b12-1.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.

Stellarium screenshots: the shaft angles (SH1–SH8)

SH1The belt on the angle in Khufu’s timescreenshot missing
Date
12 November 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
midnight solar time (Alnilam on the meridian)
View direction
south (azimuth 180°), altitude 45° (field of view c. 40°), meridian and altitude lines on
Expected in the image
  • Mintaka 45.36°, Alnilam 44.87°, Alnitak 44.58°
  • shaft angle 45°14′ (45.23°): Mintaka +0.14°, Alnilam −0.36°
Test Petrie’s shaft lies between Mintaka and Alnilam.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH1.jpg
SH1 – The belt on the angle in Khufu’s time. Petrie’s shaft lies between Mintaka and Alnilam.
SH2Mintaka exactly at 45°14′screenshot missing
Date
11 November 2606 BC (year −2605)
Time
midnight solar time
View direction
south, altitude 45° (field of view c. 30°)
Expected in the image
  • Mintaka at 45.23° on the meridian
Test Mintaka stands exactly on Petrie’s angle.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH2.jpg
SH2 – Mintaka exactly at 45°14′. Mintaka stands exactly on Petrie’s angle.
SH3Alnilam at 45°14′screenshot missing
Date
13 November 2508 BC (year −2507)
Time
midnight solar time
View direction
south, altitude 45° (field of view c. 30°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnilam at 45.23° on the meridian
Test The middle star of the belt on the angle.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH3.jpg
SH3 – Alnilam at 45°14′. The middle star of the belt on the angle.
SH4Alnitak at 45°14′screenshot missing
Date
15 November 2447 BC (year −2446)
Time
midnight solar time
View direction
south, altitude 45° (field of view c. 30°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak at 45.23° on the meridian
Test The last star of the belt leaves the window.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH4.jpg
SH4 – Alnitak at 45°14′. The last star of the belt leaves the window.
SH5Sirius at 38°28′screenshot missing
Date
4 December 2725 BC (year −2724)
Time
midnight solar time
View direction
south, altitude 38° (field of view c. 30°)
Expected in the image
  • Sirius at 38.47° on the meridian
Test Sirius on the angle of the Queen’s Chamber southern shaft.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH5.jpg
SH5 – Sirius at 38°28′. Sirius on the angle of the Queen’s Chamber southern shaft.
SH6Thuban at 31°33′ (north)screenshot missing
Date
18 April 2518 BC (year −2517)
Time
midnight solar time (upper transit of Thuban)
View direction
north (azimuth 0°), altitude 31° (field of view c. 30°)
Expected in the image
  • Thuban at 31.55° above the pole, due north
Test The pole star of the time on the angle of the King’s Chamber northern shaft.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH6.jpg
SH6 – Thuban at 31°33′ (north). The pole star of the time on the angle of the King’s Chamber northern shaft.
SH7Thuban at 31°33′, before its smallest distance from the polescreenshot missing
Date
11 October 3076 BC (year −3075)
Time
midnight solar time (upper transit of Thuban)
View direction
north (azimuth 0°), altitude 31° (field of view c. 30°)
Expected in the image
  • Thuban at 31.55°
Test Thuban also reaches the same angle before 2800 BC, when it was turning towards the pole.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH7.jpg
SH7 – Thuban at 31°33′, before its smallest distance from the pole. Thuban also reaches the same angle before 2800 BC, when it was turning towards the pole.
SH8Saiph at 38°28′screenshot missing
Date
19 November 2486 BC (year −2485)
Time
midnight solar time (Saiph on the meridian)
View direction
south, altitude 38° (field of view c. 30°)
Expected in the image
  • Saiph (κ Ori) at 38.47° on the meridian
Test Orion’s knee on the angle of the Queen’s Chamber southern shaft.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH8.jpg
SH8 – Saiph at 38°28′. Orion’s knee on the angle of the Queen’s Chamber southern shaft.
Control screens for SH1–SH8: the same claim 2000 years earlier (-V) and 2000 years later (-L)

An alignment only counts as evidence if it disappears when you shift the time. Set up the same image in Stellarium (same location, same solar altitude or the same star on the meridian), but change only the year. Save as img/stellarium/<ID>-V.jpg and <ID>-L.jpg.

SH1-VBelt on the angle – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4580 BC (year −4579)
Time
star on the meridian (midnight)
View direction
same as the main screen (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Mintaka 34.46°, Alnilam 34.05°, Alnitak 33.84° (shaft 45.23°: 11° too low)
Test The image of SH1 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH1-V.jpg
SH1-V – Belt on the angle – 2000 years earlier. The image of SH1 has disappeared.
SH1-LBelt on the angle – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
580 BC (year −579)
Time
star on the meridian (midnight)
View direction
same as the main screen (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Mintaka 54.11°, Alnilam 53.46°, Alnitak 53.00° (8–9° too high)
Test The image of SH1 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH1-L.jpg
SH1-L – Belt on the angle – 2000 years later. The image of SH1 has disappeared.
SH2-VMintaka – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4606 BC (year −4605)
Time
star on the meridian (midnight)
View direction
same as the main screen (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Mintaka 34.32°
Test The image of SH2 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH2-V.jpg
SH2-V – Mintaka – 2000 years earlier. The image of SH2 has disappeared.
SH2-LMintaka – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
606 BC (year −605)
Time
star on the meridian (midnight)
View direction
same as the main screen (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Mintaka 54.02°
Test The image of SH2 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH2-L.jpg
SH2-L – Mintaka – 2000 years later. The image of SH2 has disappeared.
SH3-VAlnilam – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4508 BC (year −4507)
Time
star on the meridian (midnight)
View direction
same as the main screen (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnilam 34.46°
Test The image of SH3 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH3-V.jpg
SH3-V – Alnilam – 2000 years earlier. The image of SH3 has disappeared.
SH3-LAlnilam – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
508 BC (year −507)
Time
star on the meridian (midnight)
View direction
same as the main screen (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnilam 53.70°
Test The image of SH3 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH3-L.jpg
SH3-L – Alnilam – 2000 years later. The image of SH3 has disappeared.
SH4-VAlnitak – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4447 BC (year −4446)
Time
star on the meridian (midnight)
View direction
same as the main screen (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak 34.59°
Test The image of SH4 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH4-V.jpg
SH4-V – Alnitak – 2000 years earlier. The image of SH4 has disappeared.
SH4-LAlnitak – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
447 BC (year −446)
Time
star on the meridian (midnight)
View direction
same as the main screen (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak 53.44°
Test The image of SH4 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH4-L.jpg
SH4-L – Alnitak – 2000 years later. The image of SH4 has disappeared.
SH5-VSirius – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4725 BC (year −4724)
Time
star on the meridian (midnight)
View direction
same as the main screen (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Sirius 30.39° (shaft 38.47°: 8° too low)
Test The image of SH5 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH5-V.jpg
SH5-V – Sirius – 2000 years earlier. The image of SH5 has disappeared.
SH5-LSirius – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
725 BC (year −724)
Time
star on the meridian (midnight)
View direction
same as the main screen (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Sirius 43.28° (5° too high)
Test The image of SH5 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH5-L.jpg
SH5-L – Sirius – 2000 years later. The image of SH5 has disappeared.
SH6-VThuban – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4518 BC (year −4517)
Time
star on the meridian (midnight)
View direction
same as the main screen (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Thuban 39.66° (shaft 31.55°: 8° too high)
Test The image of SH6 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH6-V.jpg
SH6-V – Thuban – 2000 years earlier. The image of SH6 has disappeared.
SH6-LThuban – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
518 BC (year −517)
Time
star on the meridian (midnight)
View direction
same as the main screen (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Thuban 42.67° (11° too high)
Test The image of SH6 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH6-L.jpg
SH6-L – Thuban – 2000 years later. The image of SH6 has disappeared.
SH7-VThuban – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
5076 BC (year −5075)
Time
star on the meridian (midnight)
View direction
same as the main screen (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Thuban 42.74°
Test The image of SH7 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH7-V.jpg
SH7-V – Thuban – 2000 years earlier. The image of SH7 has disappeared.
SH7-LThuban – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
1076 BC (year −1075)
Time
star on the meridian (midnight)
View direction
same as the main screen (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Thuban 39.62°
Test The image of SH7 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH7-L.jpg
SH7-L – Thuban – 2000 years later. The image of SH7 has disappeared.
SH8-VSaiph – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4486 BC (year −4485)
Time
star on the meridian (midnight)
View direction
same as the main screen (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Saiph 28.16° (10° too low)
Test The image of SH8 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH8-V.jpg
SH8-V – Saiph – 2000 years earlier. The image of SH8 has disappeared.
SH8-LSaiph – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
486 BC (year −485)
Time
star on the meridian (midnight)
View direction
same as the main screen (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Saiph 46.18° (8° too high)
Test The image of SH8 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SH8-L.jpg
SH8-L – Saiph – 2000 years later. The image of SH8 has disappeared.

12.2 Indirect clues for the northern shafts

Test cardD
Claim
The northern shafts point to the region of the imperishable (circumpolar) stars; the King’s Chamber northern shaft moreover to the pole star of the time.
Measurement and error
King’s Chamber north: Thuban −0.34° (2580 BC). Queen’s Chamber north: no star on the meridian; off the meridian there is (±1°, azimuth within 25°).
Degrees of freedom
Off the meridian every circumpolar star counts as a hit.
Strongest counter-argument
A claim that cannot fail proves little; only the meridian test (12.1) can fail.
Check
Allen 2005 (imperishable stars); SN1 and SN9.

On the meridian only the northern shaft of the King’s Chamber fits a star: Thuban, the pole star of the time (12.1). For the Queen’s Chamber an indirect story is needed: the shaft does not point at one star at one moment, but at the region of the stars that turn around the pole and never set.

IDClueWhat the sources and the calculation showLevelWeak point
I1The northern shafts point to the “imperishable stars”In the Pyramid Texts the deceased king joins the ikhemu-sek, the stars that never set Allen 2005, pdf p. 20 pdf p. 43. The text names them as a group: every circumpolar star is a candidate.DIf all eternal stars are allowed, the shaft can never fail.
I2The King’s Chamber northern shaft points to the pole starWith Petrie’s 31°33′, Thuban, the star closest to the pole, stands 0.34° below the angle in 2580 BC and exactly on it in 2519 BC (12.1). This is the only northern alignment that holds on the meridian itself.CThuban is faint (magnitude 3.7) and has no name of its own in the texts.
I3Kochab and the Great Bear in building practiceSpence (2000) explains the north alignment of the Great Pyramid with Kochab and Mizar, which passed through the pole directly above each other around 2467 BC. He derives 2478 BC (±5 years) for the laying out Spence 2000, pdf p. 3.CThis concerns the orientation of the building, not the shafts; the date is disputed.
I4Horus as the Little Bear (Kochab)The Wikipedia article The Indestructibles names the northern shaft as the path of the king “as Horus” to Kochab, without a textual source. Berio, by contrast, links the Little Bear with Taweret Berio 2014, pdf p. 42.ENo Pyramid Text equates Horus with the Little Bear (12.5).
I5New Year: stars that stay next to stars that returnAt the moment Sirius rises at New Year, 17 July 2580 BC, Dubhe (Great Bear) and Pherkad (Little Bear) stand on the angles of the two northern shafts (12.4). The calendar of the year and eternity in one image.DOff the meridian; the moment is chosen because Sirius rises then.
I6The angles as simple slopesKing’s Chamber south 45°14′ is close to a slope of 1 in 1 (45°). For Petrie’s other three angles there is no simple ratio: 31°33′, 38°28′ and 37°28′ lie between the fractions. With the Upuaut angles 7/11 and 9/11 seemed to fit; with Petrie no longer.EOnly the southern shaft of the King’s Chamber remains a “round” slope.

I1, I4 and I5 come from the texts; I2 and I6 from Petrie’s measurements and our own calculation. Levels A–E as in 9.1.

How straight are the shafts themselves?

A shaft is not a ruler: it starts horizontally, bends upwards and sometimes changes direction. The measured angle depends on where you measure.

ShaftPetrie 1883Upuaut (Gantenbrink 1993)What else is known
King’s Chamber south45°13′40″; slightly steeper further outc. 45°Runs with a slight bend to the west; starts horizontally through the granite.
King’s Chamber north31°33′ (sections of 32°05′, 31°37′ and 30°43′)c. 32.5° (upper part)Changes direction several times to avoid the Grand Gallery.
Queen’s Chamber south38°28′c. 39.5°Ends after c. 60 m at a small stone door with copper handles.
Queen’s Chamber north37°28′c. 39.1° (below the bend 33°–40°)Has a bend; above the bend the slope is not well known.

Petrie: Petrie 1883, §44 Petrie 1883, §56. Upuaut: summarised by Alison Alison and Wikipedia: Star shaft. The difference between the two measurements is up to 1°; that determines which star fits.

How precise could the builders be?

The Great Pyramid is aligned to north to within less than 3 arcminutes (0.05°); the pyramid of Khafre to within c. 6 arcminutes (Spence 2000). That is twenty times better than 1°. For the shafts this means two things:

  • For a building, 1° is not a technical limit. Whoever aligns a pyramid to 0.05° can lay a straight section of passage to 0.1°. But a shaft that has to go around the Grand Gallery is not a straight section; for the Queen’s Chamber northern shaft ±1° is therefore within the uncertainty.
  • So a deviation of 1° is not a “near hit” either. For the three shafts for which Petrie gave a clear average slope, we test at ±0.5°. At that margin Orion, Sirius and Thuban remain, and only around 2590 BC at the same time.
Assessment D What stands: the northern shaft of the King’s Chamber points to the pole star of Khufu’s time, and both northern shafts point to the region of the imperishable stars. What is missing: a text that links a northern star with a shaft. The northern shaft of the Queen’s Chamber cannot prove anything with the current measurements.

Source: Allen 2005, pdf p. 20 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 43 · Spence 2000, pdf p. 1 · Spence 2000, pdf p. 3 · Berio 2014, pdf p. 42 · Petrie 1883, §44 · Petrie 1883, §56

The northern sky at New Year. Altitude of Kochab, Pherkad, Dubhe and Mizar in the night of New Year, 17 July 2580 BC, with Petrie’s angles. At 04:05, when Sirius rises, Dubhe stands 0.6° above the King’s Chamber northern shaft and Pherkad 0.5° below the Queen’s Chamber northern shaft. Mizar passes through its lowest point (18.7°) that night and only reaches the altitudes of the northern shafts during the day (08:51 and 11:00).
How to read the graph

Kochab and Pherkad are close to their highest point and descend slowly; Dubhe rises c. 5° per hour and therefore determines the moment. With the Upuaut angle (c. 39°) Kochab fitted; with Petrie’s 37°28′ it is its neighbour Pherkad, the second star of the bowl of the Little Bear.

12.3 The star clock: which stars are in the shafts at the same time?

Test cardC
Claim
Throughout the year, at fixed moments, stars stand in three shafts at the same time: a star clock.
Measurement and error
Orion window 2–21 November: all four shafts at the same time on 11–15 November. Sirius window 25 November–18 December: three shafts on 27 November–4 December. Base probability for both northern shafts at the same time: 25%.
Degrees of freedom
33 stars chosen in advance (12.1), margin ±1°, azimuth within 25° of the shaft direction.
Strongest counter-argument
The northern stars ride along with the southern star; only Orion and Sirius carry information about the year.
Check
Count for 4580–580 BC (table and graph).

The idea: write down every moment at which two or more stars stand on a shaft angle at the same time, and see at the end of the year whether there is a pattern. Below is that count for 2580 BC, recalculated with Petrie’s angles.

Four moments with a fixed sky

MomentDate and visibilitySouthNorth: King’s Chamber 31°33′North: Queen’s Chamber 37°28′
1. Sirius rises (New Year)17 July at 04:05 (Sun −10.3°); at 04:18 (Sun −8°) clearly visible for the first timeSirius on the horizon (−0.6°, azimuth 114°)Dubhe 32.15° (azimuth 22°)Pherkad 36.93° (azimuth 352°); Kochab 38.86° falls 0.4° outside
2. Orion on the meridianvisible (Sun ≤ −6°) from 28 August; at 24:00 on 12 November (day 118 after New Year)KS: Mintaka 45.35°, Alnilam 44.87°, Alnitak 44.56°; QS: Saiph 37.71° (azimuth 173°)Kochab 31.39° (azimuth 349°) and Alioth 32.46° (azimuth 14°)Megrez 37.79° (azimuth 15°)
3. Sirius on the meridianvisible from 17 September; at 24:00 on 5 December (day 141)QS: Sirius 38.94°no star5 Dra 37.86° (azimuth 354°) and Alioth 37.01° (azimuth 12°)
4. Thuban on the meridianat 24:00 on 19 April (day 276); every night around that time—Thuban 31.21° (azimuth 0°), Aldhibah 32.21°no star

Geometric altitudes, 29.975° N, 2580 BC. A star counts if its altitude is within ±1° of Petrie’s angle and its azimuth within 25° of the shaft direction.

Midnight: windows in which two or more shafts have a star

Period (24:00)NightsShaftsStars on the shaft angle
10 Sep – 16 Sep7KN, QNKN: Dubhe; QN: Pherkad
23 Sep – 28 Sep6KN, QNKN: Aldhibah; QN: Kochab, 5 Dra
13 Oct – 16 Oct4KN, QNKN: Megrez, Phecda (14–16 Oct); QN: 5 Dra
2 Nov – 21 Nov20KS, QS, KN, QNKS: Mintaka, Alnilam (4–20 Nov), Alnitak (8–19 Nov); QS: Saiph (11–21 Nov); KN: Alioth (3–12 Nov), Kochab (6–17 Nov); QN: Phecda (2–8 Nov), Megrez (7–15 Nov). All four: 11–15 Nov.
25 Nov – 18 Dec24QS, KN, QNQS: Sirius (25 Nov–17 Dec), Saiph (25–26 Nov); KN: Mizar (25 Nov–4 Dec), Alkaid (15–18 Dec); QN: 5 Dra (27 Nov–18 Dec), Alioth (3–12 Dec)
21 Feb – 18 Mar26KN, QNKN: Thuban, Edasich (22 Feb–3 Mar); QN: Megrez (21 Feb–1 Mar), Phecda (1–6 Mar), Alioth (6–18 Mar)
24 Mar – 8 Apr16KN, QNKN: Thuban, Phecda (24–26 Mar), Megrez (24–27 Mar); QN: Mizar (24 Mar–7 Apr), Edasich (26 Mar–8 Apr)
4 May – 12 May9KN, QNKN: Thuban, Mizar; QN: Aldhibah (4–10 May), Alkaid
21 Jun – 24 Jun4KN, QNKN: Thuban; QN: Pherkad

KS = King’s Chamber south (45°14′), QS = Queen’s Chamber south (38°28′), KN = King’s Chamber north (31°33′), QN = Queen’s Chamber north (37°28′). Tested with all 33 stars chosen in advance in 12.1. Only nights in which at least two shafts have a star at the same time (116 of the 366 in total). The periods in bold contain a southern shaft. The full list per day is in sterhoogtes-2580vChr.csv.

What do you see at the end of the year?

  • The windows reveal the time of year. The southern shafts are filled only twice a year, shortly after one another: Orion from 2 to 21 November, Sirius from 25 November to 17 December. Whoever read the shafts at midnight read them in the first half of Peret, directly after the flood. In exactly those weeks the Sun rises above the causeway (13 November, 11.2).
  • Kochab is in it. In the Orion window Kochab, the brightest star of the Little Bear, stands on the King’s Chamber northern shaft from 6 to 17 November, together with Megrez or Phecda (Great Bear) on the Queen’s Chamber northern shaft. With the Upuaut angles (7.3) 5 Dra stood there.
  • 5 Dra has disappeared from the Orion window, but not from the year: at the end of September, in mid-October and in the Sirius window it stands at 37.8–38.4° at midnight, just within the 1° margin of the Queen’s Chamber northern shaft.
  • Thuban fills the spring. From the end of February to the end of June Thuban stands on the King’s Chamber northern shaft at midnight: the pole star was then at its highest at midnight.
  • All four at the same time: 11–15 November. With the broad list Orion also fills the Queen’s Chamber southern shaft: Saiph, Orion’s knee, stands at 37.6–38.1° at midnight. In those five nights every shaft has a star: the belt (King’s Chamber south), Saiph (Queen’s Chamber south), Kochab (King’s Chamber north) and Megrez (Queen’s Chamber north). Sirius and the belt together never happens: they are 1.5 hours apart on the meridian.

Is this chance? The check

At midnight there is no pair at all from 25 June to 9 September and from 19 December to 20 February. But the base probability is high: at a random moment of the day there is a star on the King’s Chamber northern angle 60% of the time, on the Queen’s Chamber northern angle 52% of the time and on both 25% of the time. At ±2° that is 76%.

YearMidnights with a star on both northern shafts (northern stars from the list)ShareSame, all 470 stars to magnitude 3.9
4580 BC5214%78
3580 BC7520%101
3080 BC10228%114
2780 BC8122%105
2580 BC9727%123
2280 BC14139%159
2080 BC9927%131
1580 BC8623%99
580 BC6518%90

The same count, margin and azimuth; only the year differs. 2780 and 2280 BC have been added. Counted with the northern stars from the list of 33 (12.1): the seven of the Great Bear, Kochab, Pherkad and Polaris, Thuban, 5 Dra, Edasich and Aldhibah, and Vega, Deneb and Arcturus (which never stand in the north at these altitudes). The last column counts all 470 stars to magnitude 3.9 as a check.

What the count shows. With Petrie’s angles the peak of the northern pairs lies not in 2580 BC but around 2340 BC (153 nights). That is due to the Great Bear, which in those centuries passed through the altitude of both shafts at midnight. So the count of midnights does not date the construction: it mainly measures how crowded the northern sky is at that altitude. The dating lies in the meridian test of 12.1, where the three stars chosen in advance fit together only around 2590 BC.

What does the other side say?

  • Search effect. With 33 stars, a margin of ±1° and an azimuth window of 25° there is often some star. A margin of 0.3° or a smaller list of stars makes the hits rarer. Those requirements are fixed in advance here.
  • North and south are not independent. The Orion window exists because Orion stands on the angle; at a 25% base probability the northern stars add little.
  • Midnight is a choice. At another hour all windows shift through the year by c. 15 days per hour. Midnight is, however, the natural reference point of the night.

Source: own calculation (Vondrák precession, proper motion, Bright Star Catalogue)

The star clock of the shafts. Each bar is a period in which a star stands on the angle of a shaft at midnight (±1°, Petrie’s angles). The southern shafts are filled only in November and December.
Midnights per year. How many midnights per year a star stands on the shaft angles, 4580–500 BC. The northern pairs peak around 2340 BC; the southern shafts are filled from c. 3000 to 1000 BC.
How to read the clock

From top to bottom: King’s Chamber northern shaft, Queen’s Chamber northern shaft, Queen’s Chamber southern shaft, King’s Chamber southern shaft. Each bar is a star. The two red dotted lines are the nights in which Orion and Sirius stand exactly on the meridian at midnight. Around 12 November there is a bar in all four rows at the same time.

Stellarium screenshots: the star clock and the calendar of Sirius (SN1–SN10)

SN1Dubhe and Pherkad at the rising of Siriusscreenshot missing
Date
17 July 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian), New Year
Time
04:05 solar time (Sun at −10.3°)
View direction
north (azimuth 350–25°), altitude 30–40° (field of view c. 50°)
Expected in the image
  • Dubhe at 32.15°, azimuth 22° (shaft 31°33′: +0.6°)
  • Pherkad at 36.93°, azimuth 352° (shaft 37°28′: −0.5°)
  • Kochab at 38.86°, azimuth 355°
Test Two northern stars on Petrie’s angles while Sirius rises.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN1.jpg
SN1 – Dubhe and Pherkad at the rising of Sirius. Two northern stars on Petrie’s angles while Sirius rises.
SN2Sirius rises: New Yearscreenshot missing
Date
17 July 2580 BC (same image as SN1)
Time
04:05 solar time (Sun at −10.3°)
View direction
east-southeast (azimuth 114°) (field of view c. 60°)
Expected in the image
  • Sirius at −0.6°, azimuth 114°
  • Alnilam at 20.5°, azimuth 123° (Orion has already risen)
Test Sirius on the horizon: the start of the heliacal rising.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN2.jpg
SN2 – Sirius rises: New Year. Sirius on the horizon: the start of the heliacal rising.
SN3Orion on the angle by day: invisiblescreenshot missing
Date
17 July 2580 BC
Time
07:44 solar time (Alnilam on the meridian; Sun at +33°)
View direction
south (azimuth 180°), altitude 45° (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Mintaka 45.35°, Alnilam 44.87°, Alnitak 44.56°
  • Kochab 31.39° and Megrez 37.79° in the north
Test Orion stands on the angle, but the Sun makes it invisible: “encircled by the Duat”.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN3.jpg
SN3 – Orion on the angle by day: invisible. Orion stands on the angle, but the Sun makes it invisible: “encircled by the Duat”.
SN4Sirius on the angle by day: invisiblescreenshot missing
Date
17 July 2580 BC
Time
09:15 solar time (Sirius on the meridian; Sun at +53°)
View direction
south (azimuth 180°), altitude 38° (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Sirius at 38.94° on the meridian (shaft 38°28′: +0.47°)
Test Sirius on the angle, invisible by day.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN4.jpg
SN4 – Sirius on the angle by day: invisible. Sirius on the angle, invisible by day.
SN5Orion on the angle before sunrise: visible for the first timescreenshot missing
Date
28 August 2580 BC
Time
04:49 solar time (Alnilam on the meridian; Sun at −6.0°)
View direction
south (azimuth 180°), altitude 45° (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • belt at 44.6–45.4°
  • Sun at −6° (civil twilight)
Test The first morning on which Orion stands visibly on its angle, 42 days after New Year.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN5.jpg
SN5 – Orion on the angle before sunrise: visible for the first time. The first morning on which Orion stands visibly on its angle, 42 days after New Year.
SN6Sirius on the angle before sunrise: visible for the first timescreenshot missing
Date
17 September 2580 BC
Time
05:03 solar time (Sirius on the meridian; Sun at −6.8°)
View direction
south (azimuth 180°), altitude 38° (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Sirius at 38.94° on the meridian
Test Sothis follows Orion 20 days later, in the order of the myth.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN6.jpg
SN6 – Sirius on the angle before sunrise: visible for the first time. Sothis follows Orion 20 days later, in the order of the myth.
SN7Mintaka, Kochab and Megrez in three shaftsscreenshot missing
Date
9 November 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
00:09 solar time (Sun at −71°)
View direction
south (azimuth 180°) and north (azimuth 345–20°) (field of view c. 60°)
Expected in the image
  • Mintaka 45.36° (shaft 45°14′), Alnilam 44.87°
  • Kochab 31.53°, azimuth 349° (shaft 31°33′)
  • Megrez 37.59°, azimuth 15° (shaft 37°28′)
Test The sharpest moment with three shafts at the same time.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN7.jpg
SN7 – Mintaka, Kochab and Megrez in three shafts. The sharpest moment with three shafts at the same time.
SN8Sirius, Mizar and 5 Drascreenshot missing
Date
4 December 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
23:48 solar time (Sun at −79°)
View direction
south (azimuth 176°) and north (azimuth 355–13°) (field of view c. 60°)
Expected in the image
  • Sirius 38.86° (shaft 38°28′: +0.39°)
  • Mizar 32.16°, azimuth 13° (shaft 31°33′: +0.61°)
  • 5 Dra 38.08°, azimuth 355° (shaft 37°28′: +0.61°)
Test The Sirius window: three shafts, but less sharp than with Orion.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN8.jpg
SN8 – Sirius, Mizar and 5 Dra. The Sirius window: three shafts, but less sharp than with Orion.
SN9Thuban on the angle at midnightscreenshot missing
Date
19 April 2579 BC (year −2578)
Time
00:00 solar time (upper transit of Thuban)
View direction
north (azimuth 0°), altitude 31° (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Thuban at 31.21°, azimuth 0° (shaft 31°33′: −0.34°)
  • Aldhibah 32.21°, azimuth 22°
Test The pole star of the time, due north, on the angle of the King’s Chamber northern shaft.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN9.jpg
SN9 – Thuban on the angle at midnight. The pole star of the time, due north, on the angle of the King’s Chamber northern shaft.
SN10All four shafts filledscreenshot missing
Date
11 November 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
00:10 solar time (Sun at −70°)
View direction
south (azimuth 175–185°) and north (azimuth 345–20°) (field of view c. 60°)
Expected in the image
  • Mintaka 45.29° (KS 45°14′), Alnilam 44.85°
  • Saiph 37.84°, azimuth 174° (QS 38°28′)
  • Kochab 31.16°, azimuth 349° (KN 31°33′)
  • Megrez 38.09°, azimuth 15° (QN 37°28′)
Test The only moment of the year at which all four shafts have a star.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN10.jpg
SN10 – All four shafts filled. The only moment of the year at which all four shafts have a star.
Control screens for SN1, SN5–SN10: 2000 years earlier (-V) and later (-L)

An alignment only counts as evidence if it disappears when you shift the time. Set up the same image in Stellarium (same location, same solar altitude or the same star on the meridian), but change only the year. Save as img/stellarium/<ID>-V.jpg and <ID>-L.jpg.

SN1-VDubhe and Pherkad – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4580 BC, 17 July 04:05
Time
same time or same star on the meridian
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • Dubhe 42.67°, Pherkad 45.69°, Kochab 47.94° (10° too high)
Test The image of SN1 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN1-V.jpg
SN1-V – Dubhe and Pherkad – 2000 years earlier. The image of SN1 has disappeared.
SN1-LDubhe and Pherkad – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
580 BC, 17 July 04:05
Time
same time or same star on the meridian
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • Dubhe 20.17°, Pherkad 27.44°, Kochab 28.96° (10° too low)
Test The image of SN1 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN1-L.jpg
SN1-L – Dubhe and Pherkad – 2000 years later. The image of SN1 has disappeared.
SN5-VOrion on the meridian – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4580 BC, Alnilam on the meridian
Time
same time or same star on the meridian
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak 33.84°, Alnilam 34.05°, Mintaka 34.46° (11° too low)
Test The image of SN5 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN5-V.jpg
SN5-V – Orion on the meridian – 2000 years earlier. The image of SN5 has disappeared.
SN5-LOrion on the meridian – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
580 BC, Alnilam on the meridian
Time
same time or same star on the meridian
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak 53.00°, Alnilam 53.46°, Mintaka 54.11° (8–9° too high)
Test The image of SN5 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN5-L.jpg
SN5-L – Orion on the meridian – 2000 years later. The image of SN5 has disappeared.
SN6-VSirius on the meridian – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4580 BC, Sirius on the meridian
Time
same time or same star on the meridian
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • Sirius 31.06° (7° too low)
Test The image of SN6 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN6-V.jpg
SN6-V – Sirius on the meridian – 2000 years earlier. The image of SN6 has disappeared.
SN6-LSirius on the meridian – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
580 BC, Sirius on the meridian
Time
same time or same star on the meridian
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • Sirius 43.48° (5° too high)
Test The image of SN6 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN6-L.jpg
SN6-L – Sirius on the meridian – 2000 years later. The image of SN6 has disappeared.
SN7-VMintaka, Kochab and Megrez – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4580 BC, 9 November 00:09
Time
same time or same star on the meridian
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • Mintaka 33.28°, Kochab 38.35°, Megrez 50.67°
Test The image of SN7 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN7-V.jpg
SN7-V – Mintaka, Kochab and Megrez – 2000 years earlier. The image of SN7 has disappeared.
SN7-LMintaka, Kochab and Megrez – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
580 BC, 9 November 00:09
Time
same time or same star on the meridian
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • Mintaka 52.85°, Kochab 24.06°, Megrez 24.50°
Test The image of SN7 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN7-L.jpg
SN7-L – Mintaka, Kochab and Megrez – 2000 years later. The image of SN7 has disappeared.
SN8-VSirius, Mizar and 5 Dra – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4580 BC, 4 December 23:48
Time
same time or same star on the meridian
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • Sirius 30.85°, Mizar 42.54°, 5 Dra 43.57°
Test The image of SN8 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN8-V.jpg
SN8-V – Sirius, Mizar and 5 Dra – 2000 years earlier. The image of SN8 has disappeared.
SN8-LSirius, Mizar and 5 Dra – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
580 BC, 4 December 23:48
Time
same time or same star on the meridian
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • Sirius 42.45°, Mizar 21.85°, 5 Dra 31.41°
Test The image of SN8 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN8-L.jpg
SN8-L – Sirius, Mizar and 5 Dra – 2000 years later. The image of SN8 has disappeared.
SN9-VThuban at midnight – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4580 BC, 19 April 00:00
Time
same time or same star on the meridian
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • Thuban 19.98°
Test The image of SN9 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN9-V.jpg
SN9-V – Thuban at midnight – 2000 years earlier. The image of SN9 has disappeared.
SN9-LThuban at midnight – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
580 BC, 19 April 00:00
Time
same time or same star on the meridian
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • Thuban 42.27°
Test The image of SN9 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN9-L.jpg
SN9-L – Thuban at midnight – 2000 years later. The image of SN9 has disappeared.
SN10-VAll four shafts – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
4580 BC, 11 November 00:10
Time
same time or same star on the meridian
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • Mintaka 32.82°, Saiph 27.42°, Kochab 37.73°, Megrez 50.90°
Test The image of SN10 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN10-V.jpg
SN10-V – All four shafts – 2000 years earlier. The image of SN10 has disappeared.
SN10-LAll four shafts – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
580 BC, 11 November 00:10
Time
same time or same star on the meridian
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • Mintaka 53.35°, Saiph 43.92°, Kochab 23.92°, Megrez 25.20°
Test The image of SN10 has disappeared.
Save file as img/stellarium/SN10-L.jpg
SN10-L – All four shafts – 2000 years later. The image of SN10 has disappeared.

12.4 9–11 November: Orion, Kochab and Megrez in all four shafts

Test cardC
Claim
Around 9–11 November 2580 BC at midnight, Orion (belt and Saiph), Kochab and Megrez stand on the angles of all four shafts at the same time.
Measurement and error
9 November 00:09: Kochab −0.02°, Megrez +0.12°, Mintaka +0.13°, Saiph −0.86°. Best moment for four shafts: 11 November 00:10, all four within 0.63°.
Degrees of freedom
Stars chosen afterwards: probability that precisely Kochab and Megrez fit at the same time 2.4% (±1°), that some pair of northern stars fits 25%.
Strongest counter-argument
The date follows from Orion alone; the northern stars ride along. The stars were not designated in advance.
Check
SN7 and SN10 with controls -V/-L.

With the Upuaut angles (7.3) 10 November was the finest moment: Alnilam, Kochab and Phecda in three shafts. With Petrie’s angles that moment falls one day earlier, and it is sharper. The four directions of this night are in 12.4b (PT1). On 9 November 2580 BC at 00:09 (day 115 after New Year, 117 after the solstice; 26 Khoiak, the day of the Sokar festival, 11.5) we have:

ShaftAngle (Petrie)StarHeightDifferenceAzimuth
King’s Chamber south45°14′Mintaka (Orion’s belt)45,36°+0,13°181°
Alnilam44,87°−0,36°179°
King’s Chamber north31°33′Kochab (Little Bear)31,53°−0,02°349°
Queen’s Chamber north37°28′Megrez (Great Bear)37,59°+0,12°15°

Geometric altitudes at 29.975° N. The moment is 9 minutes after midnight and 4 minutes before Alnilam’s transit through the meridian.

And the fourth shaft? At the same moment Saiph, Orion’s knee, stands at 37.61° (azimuth 172°): 0.86° below the Queen’s Chamber southern shaft. All four shafts then have a star within 1°. Two nights later, on 11 November at 00:10, all four are within 0.63°: Mintaka 45.29° (+0.06°), Saiph 37.84° (−0.63°), Kochab 31.16° (−0.39°) and Megrez 38.09° (+0.62°) (SN10). Three of the four stars come from the lists of Trimble, Badawy and Bauval or from Orion itself; Megrez belongs to the Foreleg.

That is about ⅓ of the year after the solstice (day 117 of 365, day 115 after New Year; the exact third after the solstice falls on day 121.7, the day on which the Sun rises above the causeway, 11.2).

And New Year itself?

At the moment Sirius appears on the horizon at New Year, 17 July 2580 BC (04:05, Sun at −10.3°), the north shows:

StarHeightShaftDifference
Dubhe (Great Bear)32.15° (azimuth 22°)King’s Chamber north 31°33′+0,60°
Pherkad (Little Bear)36.93° (azimuth 352°)Queen’s Chamber north 37°28′−0,54°
Kochab (Little Bear)38.86° (azimuth 355°)Queen’s Chamber north 37°28′+1.39° (outside the margin)

The altitudes at the rising of Sirius are the same every day; only the hour and the position of the Sun shift (at the solstice, 15 July: 04:13, Sun −8.8°). Thirteen minutes later, when Sirius is clearly visible for the first time (04:18, Sun −8°, Sirius 2° high), Dubhe (33.2°) and Kochab (38.6°) are 1–1.7° off; only Pherkad remains just within the margin (−0.96°). The four directions of the solstice are in 12.4b (PT2).

With the Upuaut angles (7.3) Kochab and Dubhe both stood on their shaft at the rising of Sirius. With Petrie’s angles the picture is slightly different: Dubhe remains (+0.6°), and Kochab’s place is taken by its neighbour Pherkad. Both form the “bowl” of a dipper: Dubhe of the Great Bear, Kochab and Pherkad of the Little Bear.

What makes this moment strong

  • Three shafts in one image, with the best-known northern star of the time (Kochab) to within a hundredth of a degree and the Great Bear to within a tenth of a degree.
  • The timing: midnight, about ⅓ of a year after the rising of Sirius, in the weeks in which Orion stands on the meridian at midnight.
  • The check: 2000 years earlier or later the image is completely gone (SN7-V and SN7-L).

What the other side says

  • The stars were chosen afterwards. That precisely Kochab and Megrez fit at the same time has a probability of 2.4% (±1°) or 0.7% (±0.3°), but only if they had been designated in advance. Afterwards you choose from all possibilities: that some pair of northern stars fits happens 25% of the time (±1°).
  • The date adds little. With Orion on the meridian the whole sky is the same every day; 9 November is merely the day on which that happens at midnight.
  • Check over time. Orion on its angle (±0.5°) gives 2705–2344 BC; throughout that period some pair of northern stars always stands on the angles together with Orion. So the northern stars do not refine the dating; Orion, Sirius and Thuban do the work.
Measurement±1°±2°
Probability that at a random moment one of the 14 northern stars stands at 31°33′ and one at 37°28′ (azimuth ≤ 25°)25%76%
Same with all 470 stars to magnitude 3.932%83%
Probability that precisely Kochab stands at 31°33′ and Megrez at 37°28′2,4%4,9%

Own calculation for 2580 BC, 1440 moments over one sidereal day.

Source: Allen 2005, pdf p. 43 · Spence 2000, pdf p. 1

Stellarium screenshots: two shaft moments in four directions (PT1, PT2)

Two moments from 12.4, each made towards the north, east, south and west, with the Egyptian sky culture switched on. This shows what stands around the shaft stars. The zodiac of Dendera is a late source (2.5); all figures are as Stellarium draws them.

11 November, midnight: Osiris above the southern shaft (PT1)
PT1 southOsiris on the meridian above the southern shaftscreenshot missing
Date
11 November 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian)
Time
00:00 local time (midnight)
View direction
south (field of view c. 102°)
Expected in the image
  • King Osiris (Orion) on the meridian (azimuth 180°), the belt at c. 45°
  • Taurus, Aries and Pisces on the right, Hathor Cow and Gemini at upper left
  • Goddess Satis and Goddess Anuket on the left, the Babylonian Rooster and Canopus below
Test Does Osiris (Orion’s belt) stand at midnight at the altitude of the southern shaft of the King’s Chamber (45°14′)?
Save file as img/stellarium/pt1-s.jpg
PT1 south – Osiris on the meridian above the southern shaft. Osiris (Orion) stands on the meridian, with the belt at c. 45°: the angle of the King’s Chamber southern shaft (12.4: Mintaka at 45.29° on 11 November, 00:10). On the left Hathor Cow, Satis and Anuket, on the right Taurus, Aries and Pisces; at the top Gemini, in Taurus the Moon.
PT1 northThe northern sky with Falcon and Thigh of the Bullscreenshot missing
Date
11 November 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian)
Time
00:00 local time (midnight)
View direction
north (field of view c. 102°)
Expected in the image
  • The Falcon (Little Bear, 12.5) and the Thigh of the Bull (Great Bear) at the altitude of the northern shafts
  • The Guardian (Arcturus) low near the north point, the fox near the Thigh
  • Leo upside down on the right, Cassiopeia and Cygnus/Cepheus on the left
Test Do the northern stars stand at the altitude of the northern shafts (31°33′ and 37°28′) while Osiris stands on the meridian in the south?
Save file as img/stellarium/pt1-n.jpg
PT1 north – The northern sky with Falcon and Thigh of the Bull. The northern sky at the same moment: the Falcon and the Thigh of the Bull stand at the altitude of the northern shafts (12.4: Kochab 31.2° and Megrez 38.1° on 11 November, 00:10). The Guardian stands low near the north point, Leo stands upside down on the right.
PT1 eastThe east: Leo, Hathor Cow, Satis and Anuketscreenshot missing
Date
11 November 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian)
Time
00:00 local time (midnight)
View direction
east (field of view c. 102°)
Expected in the image
  • Leo with Berenice above the eastern horizon, above them Cancer and Hathor Cow
  • Goddess Satis, Goddess Anuket and the Babylonian Rooster with the Milky Way behind
  • King Osiris high in the southeast, Canopus low in the southeast
Test Which figures rise in the east while Osiris stands in the south?
Save file as img/stellarium/pt1-e.jpg
PT1 east – The east: Leo, Hathor Cow, Satis and Anuket. Towards the east: Leo with Berenice rises, above them Cancer and the Hathor Cow. On the right stand Goddess Satis, Goddess Anuket and the Babylonian Rooster with the Milky Way behind, and Osiris (Orion) high in the southeast.
PT1 westThe west: Field, Pisces, Aries and Taurusscreenshot missing
Date
11 November 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian)
Time
00:00 local time (midnight)
View direction
west (field of view c. 102°)
Expected in the image
  • The Field (Som.) on the western horizon (azimuth 270°), above it Pisces and Aries
  • On the left Taurus with the Moon, King Osiris and the Babylonian Rooster
  • On the right the Falcon, Cassiopeia and Cygnus/Cepheus
Test What is in the western sky at the moment Osiris stands above the southern shaft?
Save file as img/stellarium/pt1-w.jpg
PT1 west – The west: Field, Pisces, Aries and Taurus. Towards the west: the Field (Som.) is on the horizon, above it Pisces and Aries. On the left stand Taurus with the Moon, Osiris and the Babylonian Rooster; on the right the Falcon, Cassiopeia and Cygnus/Cepheus.
15 July, 04:16: the solstice and the rising of Sirius (PT2)
PT2 eastSirius, Orion and Hathor Cow risescreenshot missing
Date
15 July 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian), summer solstice
Time
04:16 local time, Sun at −7.2°; Sirius on the horizon (altitude 0.9°)
View direction
east to southeast (field of view c. 143°)
Expected in the image
  • Sirius (Sopdet/Isis) at azimuth 115° and altitude 0.9°, with the Goddess Satis
  • King Osiris (Orion) higher in the east-southeast, the Hathor Cow lower near the east
  • The Sun (−7°) on the left near Leo, just below the horizon
  • The Milky Way as an arch from the east-southeast (105°) through the zenith to the west-northwest (285°), in the direction of the causeway
Test Do Sirius (Isis), Orion (Osiris) and the Hathor Cow rise together in the east at the solstice?
Save file as img/stellarium/pt2-e.jpg
PT2 east – Sirius, Orion and Hathor Cow rise. Sirius (Sopdet, the star of Isis) stands on the horizon (azimuth 115°, altitude 0.9°), not yet visible: two days later, at New Year, it is visible for the first time. Orion (Osiris) and the Hathor Cow have already risen. Stellarium draws the Goddess Satis at Sirius.Note: at the summer solstice, in the morning twilight, the Milky Way runs as a single arch across the sky, from azimuth 105° in the east-southeast to 285° in the west-northwest: exactly along the line of the causeway (104–105°) and its extension to the west. The arch passes almost through the zenith (the galactic pole is only 7° below the horizon). Own calculation (galactic equator, Vondrák precession): the equator of the Milky Way crosses the horizon at 105° and 285° when the Sun is at −10.4°, about 20 minutes before this image; at this image (Sun −7.2°) at 107.6° and 287.6°, well within the width of the band. See also PT2 west.
PT2 southOsiris left of south, Pisces and Aquarius on the rightscreenshot missing
Date
15 July 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian), summer solstice
Time
04:16 local time, Sun at −7.2°; Sirius on the horizon (altitude 0.9°)
View direction
south (field of view c. 121°)
Expected in the image
  • King Osiris (Orion) left of the south point, Taurus and Aries above
  • Pisces, the Field (Som.) and Aquarius on the right, towards the southwest
  • On the left on the horizon Sirius with the Goddess Satis
Test Where do Osiris and Aquarius stand at the moment Sirius rises?
Save file as img/stellarium/pt2-s.jpg
PT2 south – Osiris left of south, Pisces and Aquarius on the right. Orion (Osiris) stands left of south, Taurus and Aries above. On the right stand Pisces, the Field (Som.) and Aquarius. On the left Sirius rises on the horizon, with the Goddess Satis.
PT2 northFalcon and Thigh of the Bull at the altitude of the northern shaftsscreenshot missing
Date
15 July 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian), summer solstice
Time
04:16 local time, Sun at −7.2°; Sirius on the horizon (altitude 0.9°)
View direction
north (field of view c. 121°)
Expected in the image
  • The Thigh of the Bull (Great Bear) with Dubhe at c. 32° (shaft 31°33′)
  • The Falcon (Little Bear, 12.5) with Pherkad at c. 37° and Kochab at c. 39° (shaft 37°28′)
  • The Guardian (Arcturus) low near the north point, Leo at lower right
Test Do Dubhe and Pherkad stand at the altitude of the northern shafts at the rising of Sirius on the solstice (12.4)?
Save file as img/stellarium/pt2-n.jpg
PT2 north – Falcon and Thigh of the Bull at the altitude of the northern shafts. The northern sky at the rising of Sirius: the Thigh of the Bull and the Falcon stand at the altitude of the northern shafts (12.4: Dubhe 32.2°, Pherkad 36.9°, Kochab 38.9°). The Guardian stands low near the north point, at lower right Leo.
PT2 westField, Pisces and Aquarius in the westscreenshot missing
Date
15 July 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian), summer solstice
Time
04:16 local time, Sun at −7.2°; Sirius on the horizon (altitude 0.9°)
View direction
west (field of view c. 121°)
Expected in the image
  • The Field (Som.) and Pisces above the western horizon, on the left Aquarius and Aries
  • On the right the Falcon, Cygnus/Cepheus and the Guardian, up to the northwest
  • The Eagle just above the horizon near the west point
Test Do the Field and Aquarius stand opposite the rising Sirius on the western side?
Save file as img/stellarium/pt2-w.jpg
PT2 west – Field, Pisces and Aquarius in the west. Towards the west: the Field (Som.) and Pisces above the horizon, on the left Aquarius and Aries. On the right the Falcon, Cygnus/Cepheus and the Guardian on the northwestern horizon; the Eagle stands just above the west point.Note: here the Milky Way reaches the western horizon at azimuth 285°: the extension of the causeway (105°) to the west-northwest. The band runs from the causeway in the east over the zenith to this point (see PT2 east).

12.5 Names and gods: what do the Pyramid Texts say about these stars?

Test cardD
Claim
The gods of the shaft stars (Osiris, Isis, the Striker, the imperishable ones) form a coherent story of the year.
Measurement and error
Cannot be expressed in degrees.
Degrees of freedom
Osiris and Isis fit almost any moment (dying, birth, return).
Strongest counter-argument
The Pyramid Texts are more than two centuries younger than the Great Pyramid.
Check
Spell numbers in Allen 2005.

What did the Egyptians see in these stars, and what do the gods do with them? First a remark on dating: the Book of the Dead is a text of the New Kingdom (around 1550 BC), more than a millennium after Khufu. The oldest source with star stories are the Pyramid Texts (from Unas, c. 2350 BC), still more than two centuries younger than the Great Pyramid. They are the closest source, not a contemporary one.

Star or regionEgyptian name and godWhat the Pyramid Texts say (Allen 2005)On the shaft angleSource
Orion (belt; Alnilam)Orion, identified with Osiris, the lord of the deadThe king is “the one in Orion” and Orion is called the father of the gods. Orion and Sothis are encircled by the Duat (netherworld) and return. The king “touches the sky as Orion”. Orion’s birth shall not be hindered, and the same applies to the king.KS 45°14′: transit on the meridian, visible 28 August, 12 November at 24:00Allen 2005, pdf p. 43 Allen 2005, pdf p. 48 Allen 2005, pdf p. 63 Allen 2005, pdf p. 97 Allen 2005, pdf p. 187
SiriusSothis (Sopdet), identified with Isis; sister and mother of the king, mother of Horus“His sister is Sothis, his brother the morning star.” The king is the son of Sothis; from Osiris and Isis Horus is born, “Horus in Sothis”. Sothis rises as the birth of the new.QS 38°28′: heliacal rising 17 July (New Year), visible on the meridian from 17 September, at 24:00 on 5 DecemberAllen 2005, pdf p. 59 Allen 2005, pdf p. 67 Allen 2005, pdf p. 92 Allen 2005, pdf p. 136
Great Bear (Dubhe, Alioth, Mizar, …)Striker (Egyptian meskhetiu, the “foreleg”): the adze of the Opening of the Mouth ritual, linked to AnubisFor the king the imperishable Striker is purified (spell 207). With the adze the mouth and eyes of the deceased are opened, so that he can speak and eat. Allen calls the Striker Ursa Major, “which the Egyptians saw as an adze”.KN 31°33′: Dubhe (New Year, 17 July), Alioth (Orion on the meridian); QN 37°28′: Megrez (9 November), Alioth (Sirius on the meridian)Allen 2005, pdf p. 67 Allen 2005, pdf p. 436 Allen 2005, pdf p. 453
Northern circumpolar starsImperishable stars (ikhemu-sek), “islands” in the northern Marsh of RestThe king goes to them, leads them and sits at their head. If the king becomes “Horus of the Duat”, that is itself an imperishable star (spell 148). Allen assumes that the builders of the first pyramids had this fate (an eternal existence among the northern stars) in mind.KN 31°33′: Thuban (the pole star) and Kochab (9 November); QN 37°28′: Pherkad (New Year, 17 July)Allen 2005, pdf p. 20 Allen 2005, pdf p. 23 Allen 2005, pdf p. 43 Allen 2005, pdf p. 60 Allen 2005, pdf p. 118 Allen 2005, pdf p. 128
Little Bear and Draco (Kochab, Pherkad, 5 Dra, Thuban)Uncertain. Later star charts show a hippopotamus goddess (Ipy, goddess of birth); Berio (Sino-Platonic Papers 253) links the Little Bear to Taweret.No Pyramid Text has been found that equates Horus with the Little Bear. Horus of the Duat is, however, called an imperishable star.KN: Kochab (9 November), Thuban; QN: Pherkad, 5 Dra (December)Allen 2005, pdf p. 43 Allen 2005, pdf p. 445 Berio 2014, pdf p. 41–43

The spell numbers follow Allen (2005). The pdf references are pdf pages. Quotations are summarised, not quoted literally.

The story in the star clock

Put the moments of 12.1–12.4 one after the other and the gods appear in the right order, like a story of the year:

  • 17 July, 04:05: New Year. Sothis (Isis) rises just before the Sun and announces the new year. In the north two imperishable stars stand on the angles of the northern shafts: Dubhe of the Striker and Pherkad of the Little Bear. Orion and Sothis themselves stand on their shaft angle by day, invisible: “encircled by the Duat”.
  • 28 August and 17 September: the return. Orion (Osiris) is the first to return to the meridian out of the glare of the Sun, 42 days after New Year; Sothis follows 20 days later.
  • 2–17 November: Osiris on the meridian. At midnight Orion’s belt stands on the southern shaft of the King’s Chamber. On 9 November, at the same time, Kochab (Little Bear) stands on the King’s Chamber northern shaft and Megrez (Great Bear, the Striker) on the Queen’s Chamber northern shaft. Story: Osiris stands upright among the imperishable ones, and the adze lies ready to open the king’s mouth.
  • 25 November–17 December: Isis takes over. Sothis stands on the southern shaft of the Queen’s Chamber at midnight, with Mizar (Striker) and 5 Dra in the north.
  • End of February–June: the pole star. Thuban stands on the King’s Chamber northern shaft at midnight: the axis of the sky itself.

So there is a consistent, meaningful story with the gods called Osiris, Isis, Horus and the imperishable ones. But the question “does the god’s task fit the moment” is too broad to prove anything.

What does the other side say?

  • Too much leeway. Osiris is the god of dying and rising again and Isis of birth; every moment of the year can be linked with one of those roles. A test must say in advance what must not happen.
  • Striker coincidence. That at almost every moment a star of the Great Bear stands on a northern shaft is not chance but a consequence of the position of the Great Bear in those centuries: 29% of all hits on the King’s Chamber northern angle are a star of the Great Bear.
  • The Little Bear has no certain Egyptian name. One source (Sino-Platonic Papers 253) reads it as the hippopotamus (Reret or Taweret); other sources place that hippopotamus at Draco, Hercules and Boötes. For Kochab, Pherkad and 5 Dra (the QN stars) no god has been established, so the Queen’s Chamber northern shaft cannot be tested against the tasks. “Horus = Little Bear” remains a hypothesis (see the note below).
  • The texts are younger than the construction. Allen himself says that the stellar destiny in the Pyramid Texts may have been interpreted differently (as the existence of the spirit before sunrise).
  • The names of Ursa Major are not settled. Berio reads the meskhetiu as Boötes and the Great Bear as a crocodile; that conflicts with the conventional (Allen) reading.

Alioth and Mizar: what do the oldest sources say? (with reservations)

Alioth (ε UMa, on the northern shaft when Orion culminates), Megrez (δ UMa, 9 November) and Mizar (ζ UMa, in the north with Sothis on 4 December) are three of the seven stars of the Great Bear. In the oldest sources they have no name of their own and no god of their own. The Egyptians only knew the constellation as a whole: Msḫtjw (Meskhetiu), the foreleg of a bull, also seen as an adze. The oldest mention is in the Pyramid Texts (spell 302, Pyr. 458b–c), where Msḫtjw is an eternal place of purification among the imperishable stars. According to Nemes (ENiM 13, 2020) individual stars of the Bear are not preserved by name in Egyptian texts. Alioth and Mizar are medieval Arabic names.

  • What this means for the table. The match of Alioth or Megrez with a shaft angle is not a match with a star the Egyptians themselves knew. At most we can say that the shaft points to the region of the Meskhetiu. The same applies to Mizar on 4 December.
  • Where Mizar and Alioth do appear. Only in modern literature on the orientation of pyramids. Spence (2000, Nature 408) uses Kochab and Mizar for the north alignment (the line connecting them passes the pole around 2467 BC). A preprint of the Max Planck Institute (P511) argues that the horizontal position of Mizar beside Alioth around 2548 BC marked the meridian of Giza. That is a modern hypothesis; no ancient text names these two stars in this connection.
  • Later sources. The link of the foreleg with a god (Seth) and with guardians such as a hippopotamus goddess comes from much younger texts (New Kingdom) and has not been checked against the sources here.

Caveat: this is a first search of secondary literature, summarised by a search tool; the page references have not been checked. Further clues may yet change this picture. Sources: Nemes, “The mythological importance of the constellation Msḫtjw” (ENiM 13, 2020) ENiM 13 (pdf online); MPIWG Preprint 511 MPIWG P511; Spence 2000 Spence 2000, pdf p. 3.

Little Bear, Horus and the hippopotamus (with reservations)

In Stellarium’s Egyptian sky culture (based on Belmonte, “A Map of the Ancient Egyptian Firmament”, and thus on late sources such as Dendera, more than two millennia younger than the Great Pyramid) there is a Falcon with, among others, Kochab, Pherkad, the pole star and some faint stars. That leads to the idea that the Little Bear belongs to Horus. In the sources we read no support for this was found.

  • The falcon is elsewhere. According to Sino-Platonic Papers 253 the falcon constellation is Aquila, not something near the pole. The same author reads the Little Bear as the hippopotamus (Taweret).
  • Role of the hippopotamus. According to the All Skies Encyclopaedia (exopla.net) this is Reret, a northern constellation that occurs in the Ramesside star clocks and at Dendera. As Isis she holds two mooring posts to which the Meskhetiu (the leg of Seth) is tied, so that it keeps turning around the pole and can do no harm. As Reret or Taweret she also protected pregnant women and newborns, and helped with rebirth. That last role fits the king’s rising to the imperishable stars, but that link is our own suggestion.
  • Which stars? The sources differ. The encyclopaedia places Reret over Draco, Hercules, Lyra and Boötes and not over the Little Bear, so Kochab probably does not belong to it.
  • Where a falcon figure does appear. The Ikhemu-sek, the imperishable stars, are depicted in tombs as a woman, lion, bull, man, falcon-headed man and hippopotamus. So there is a falcon-headed figure among the northern gods, but it is not linked to a particular group of stars.

Caveat: a first search of secondary literature and encyclopaedias, summarised by a search tool; the spell and page numbers have not been checked and Priskin’s article (ENiM 12) on the star diagrams could not be retrieved ENiM 12 (contents). Sources: Sino-Platonic Papers 253 Berio 2014, pdf p. 41; All Skies Encyclopaedia Reret; Wikipedia Ikhemu-sek; Stellarium, Egyptian sky culture (Belmonte).

Assessment D The names and roles (Orion = Osiris, Sothis = Isis, Striker = adze of the mouth opening, northern stars = imperishable ones) are in the Pyramid Texts and fit the moments nicely. As a clue that is valuable, as proof too broad.

Source: Allen 2005, pdf p. 20 Allen 2005, pdf p. 23 Allen 2005, pdf p. 43 Allen 2005, pdf p. 48 Allen 2005, pdf p. 59 Allen 2005, pdf p. 60 Allen 2005, pdf p. 63 Allen 2005, pdf p. 67 Allen 2005, pdf p. 92 Allen 2005, pdf p. 97 Allen 2005, pdf p. 118 Allen 2005, pdf p. 128 Allen 2005, pdf p. 136 Allen 2005, pdf p. 187 Allen 2005, pdf p. 436 Allen 2005, pdf p. 453

Orion. Orion (Egyptian: Sah), identified with Osiris in the Pyramid Texts.
The Opening of the Mouth ritual. In the ritual the priest opens the mouth and eyes of the deceased, among other things with an adze; according to Allen the Egyptians saw the Great Bear as such an adze.
The Great Bear. The Great Bear (Egyptian: the Striker or Foreleg).

Chapter 13 Time, precession and control

The sky shifts over the centuries. We use that shift as a clock and as a check: how exceptional is the time of Khufu, and how did the Egyptians orient their buildings elsewhere?

13.1 Precession: from Leo in 10,000 BC to Orion in 2580 BC

Test cardE
Claim
The builders knew about precession and referred to Leo in 10,000 BC.
Measurement and error
The astronomy is correct (Orion minimum c. 10,700 BC); the knowledge has not been demonstrated.
Degrees of freedom
Year, constellation and solar altitude are freely chosen.
Strongest counter-argument
Precession was only described by Hipparchus (c. 130 BC).
Check
P1–P6 with controls -V/-L.

Did the builders know about precession, the slow turning of the Earth’s axis (c. 25,800 years per cycle)? The working hypothesis: in 10,000 BC, at the spring equinox, Leo lay almost horizontally on the horizon just before sunrise, and Orion then stood in the south, at one of its lowest positions. After that Orion rises until it reaches the angle of the shaft (45°) around 2500 BC.

What the calculation shows

At the spring equinox in 10,000 BC the constellation Leo lies like a recumbent figure along the eastern horizon: the line from Denebola to Regulus makes only 4.8° with the horizon. At that moment Orion stands 7.6° to 9.7° high in the south-southeast. That is close to the absolute minimum for the belt: Alnitak never comes lower than 9.15° on the meridian (c. 10,720 BC).

Moment (spring equinox, Sun −6°, c. 05:32)11,000 BC10,500 BC10,000 BC
Altitude and azimuth of Regulus9,5° / 109°5,6° / 104°1,7° / 98°
Altitude and azimuth of Denebola7,1° / 84°3,2° / 78°−0,5° / 73°
Slope of the line Regulus–Denebola relative to the horizon5,3°5,3°4,8°
Orion’s belt (Alnitak / Alnilam / Mintaka)9,2 / 10,1 / 11,1°8,6 / 9,5 / 10,6°7,6 / 8,6 / 9,7°
Azimuth of the belt180°174°168°

All values geometric. The length of the line Regulus–Denebola is 25.5°. In Stellarium the Julian date of this spring equinox is c. 9 June (11,000 BC), 6 June (10,500) and 3 June (10,000): find the day on which the declination of the Sun passes 0°.

Orion rises

YearAlnitakAlnilamMintakaNight in which Alnilam stands on the meridian at midnightSolar longitude
13,000 BC13,8°14,9°16,1°——
10,720–10,550 BC9.15° (minimum)9.97° (min. 10,630)10.94° (min. 10,550)——
10,000 BC9,6°10,3°11,2°11 Sep (Julian)101°
8000 BC15,6°16,0°16,6°2 Oct135°
6000 BC25,8°26,0°26,4°20 Oct165°
4000 BC37,1°37,3°37,7°3 Nov193°
3000 BC42,4°42,7°43,2°9 Nov205°
2580 BC44,6°44,9°45,3°12 Nov210°
2000 BC47,3°47,7°48,2°——
0 (1 BC)54,8°55,3°56,0°——
AD 200058,1°58,8°59,7°——

Altitude of the belt on the meridian (upper transit) at 29.975° N, calculated geometrically with Vondrák’s precession (2011) and proper motion; years are rounded astronomically (the year −9999 is 10,000 BC).

In 8200 years the belt rises from 9.2° to 45° and reaches the shaft angle in the time of Khufu. But 45° is not an end point: it then keeps rising to c. 59° in our own time. In the same period the date on which Alnilam culminates at midnight shifts from 11 September to 12 November (Julian; the solar longitude goes from 101° to 210°), the actual proof of the shift.

Leo and Regulus

Erydir (2025) reports that in 9001 BC Regulus rises at azimuth 90° at the summer solstice, “just before sunrise”. On recalculation the azimuth is right (in 9100 BC Regulus rises at 90.9°), but on the real solstice (26 August Julian, Sun at 61°) Regulus already stands 56° high at sunrise and rose hours earlier. The date “21 June” set as the solstice in Stellarium lies more than two months before the real solstice in 9000 BC. Check with the declination of the Sun.

What does the other side say?

  • Not a single source. There is no text, building or excavation from 10,000 BC in Egypt that records observations of Leo or Orion. Precession was only described around 130 BC by Hipparchus.
  • The angle of Orion does not fit. Krupp and Fairall found 47–50° instead of the 38° formed by the pyramids (11.1); in our calculation they only agree around 12,000 BC.
  • Dating of the Sphinx. Egyptologists date the Sphinx to the time of Khafre (c. 2500 BC); the lion hypothesis requires an older date (Hancock et al.), with references to water damage. The sources of this research contain no argument for it.
  • Any building from 2580 BC. Every building from that time stood under the same sky: that the belt stood 45° high then is a fact, not proof of knowledge from 8000 years earlier.
Assessment E The astronomy is correct (Orion minimum c. 10,700 BC, Leo flat in 10,000 BC), but there is no indication that anyone knew this in 2580 BC. The strongest argument for: the rising belt as an 8000-year process. The strongest against: no source and a wrong tilt in 10,500 BC.

Source: Orion correlation theory, pdf p. 1 Orion correlation theory, pdf p. 2 Erydir 2025, pdf p. 1 Vodolazhskaya et al. 2015, pdf p. 1

Precession in one sentence
The Earth’s axis turns full circle in 25,800 years. As a result the spring equinox moves backwards through the constellations (now in Pisces, in 2580 BC in Taurus, in 10,000 BC in Leo). The stars themselves then stand at a different altitude each time: Orion sinks and rises over the centuries.
Two things you need to know
(1) The belt keeps rising to 59°: the 45° of the shaft is a passage, not a goal. (2) On the spring equinox in the morning Orion only stands in the south in 10,000 BC; in 2580 BC it is then well below the horizon (−38°). The shaft therefore looks at the midnight image in November.

Stellarium screenshots: precession (P1–P6)

P1Leo lies flat on the horizonscreenshot missing
Date
spring equinox 10,000 BC (year −9999), c. 3 June Julian
Time
Sun at −6°, c. 05:32 solar time
View direction
east (azimuth 90°) (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Regulus at 1.7°, azimuth 98°
  • Denebola at −0.5°, azimuth 73°
  • The line Denebola–Regulus makes 4.8° with the horizon
Test Constellation lines and figure of Leo on; horizon flat.
Save file as img/stellarium/P1.jpg
P1 – Leo lies flat on the horizon. Constellation lines and figure of Leo on; horizon flat.
P2Orion in the south at its lowest pointscreenshot missing
Date
same date as P1
Time
Sun at −6°, c. 05:32
View direction
south-southeast (azimuth 168°) (field of view c. 50°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak 7.6°, Alnilam 8.6°, Mintaka 9.7° at azimuth 167–169°
  • Sirius below the horizon (−7.6°)
Test Orion is almost at its lowest position (minimum 9.15° on the meridian).
Save file as img/stellarium/P2.jpg
P2 – Orion in the south at its lowest point. Orion is almost at its lowest position (minimum 9.15° on the meridian).
P3Orion in 8000 BCscreenshot missing
Date
2 October 8000 BC (year −7999)
Time
midnight (Alnilam on the meridian)
View direction
south, altitude 16° (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak 15.6°, Alnilam 16.0°, Mintaka 16.6°
Test Meridian line on; read off the altitude.
Save file as img/stellarium/P3.jpg
P3 – Orion in 8000 BC. Meridian line on; read off the altitude.
P4Orion in 6000 BCscreenshot missing
Date
20 October 6000 BC (year −5999)
Time
midnight
View direction
south, altitude 26° (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak 25.8°, Alnilam 26.0°, Mintaka 26.4°
Test Orion then stands almost 10° higher than in 8000 BC.
Save file as img/stellarium/P4.jpg
P4 – Orion in 6000 BC. Orion then stands almost 10° higher than in 8000 BC.
P5Orion in 4000 BCscreenshot missing
Date
3 November 4000 BC (year −3999)
Time
midnight
View direction
south, altitude 37° (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak 37.1°, Alnilam 37.3°, Mintaka 37.7°
Test Orion is two thirds of the way to 45°.
Save file as img/stellarium/P5.jpg
P5 – Orion in 4000 BC. Orion is two thirds of the way to 45°.
P6Orion in 3000 BCscreenshot missing
Date
9 November 3000 BC (year −2999)
Time
midnight
View direction
south, altitude 43° (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak 42.4°, Alnilam 42.7°, Mintaka 43.2°
Test Still 2° below the shaft; 400 years later it is 45° (see SH1).
Save file as img/stellarium/P6.jpg
P6 – Orion in 3000 BC. Still 2° below the shaft; 400 years later it is 45° (see SH1).
Control screens for P1–P6: the same claim 2000 years earlier (-V) and 2000 years later (-L)

An alignment only counts as evidence if it disappears when you shift the time. Set up the same image in Stellarium (same location, same solar altitude or the same star on the meridian), but change only the year. Save as img/stellarium/<ID>-V.jpg and <ID>-L.jpg.

P1-VLeo on the horizon – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
12,000 BC (year −11999)
Time
Sun at −6°, spring equinox
View direction
east (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Regulus at 16.9°, azimuth 120.9°
  • Denebola at 15.0°, azimuth 94.3°
  • Slope Denebola–Regulus 4.3°
Test Expectation 12,000 BC: Leo already stands 15–17° above the horizon (no longer flat). 8000 BC: Leo has not yet risen. Only around 10,000 BC does it lie flat on the horizon.
Save file as img/stellarium/P1-V.jpg
P1-V – Leo on the horizon – 2000 years earlier. Expectation 12,000 BC: Leo already stands 15–17° above the horizon (no longer flat). 8000 BC: Leo has not yet risen. Only around 10,000 BC does it lie flat on the horizon.
P1-LLeo on the horizon – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
8000 BC (year −7999)
Time
Sun at −6°, spring equinox
View direction
east (field of view c. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Regulus at -13.8°, azimuth 75.7°
  • Denebola at -13.6°, azimuth 49.6°
  • Slope Denebola–Regulus -0.6°
Test Expectation 8000 BC: Leo has not yet risen (below the horizon).
Save file as img/stellarium/P1-L.jpg
P1-L – Leo on the horizon – 2000 years later. Expectation 8000 BC: Leo has not yet risen (below the horizon).
P2-VOrion in the south – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
12,000 BC (year −11999)
Time
Sun at −6°, spring equinox
View direction
south (field of view c. 50°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak at 9.2°, azimuth 191.4°
  • Alnilam at 9.9°, azimuth 192.6°
  • Mintaka at 10.8°, azimuth 193.7°
Test Expectation 12,000 BC: Orion now stands in the south-southwest (azimuth c. 192°), altitude 9–11°.
Save file as img/stellarium/P2-V.jpg
P2-V – Orion in the south – 2000 years earlier. Expectation 12,000 BC: Orion now stands in the south-southwest (azimuth c. 192°), altitude 9–11°.
P2-LOrion in the south – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
8000 BC (year −7999)
Time
Sun at −6°, spring equinox
View direction
south (field of view c. 50°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak at -0.3°, azimuth 143.6°
  • Alnilam at 0.9°, azimuth 144.3°
  • Mintaka at 2.2°, azimuth 144.8°
Test Expectation 8000 BC: Orion stands on the horizon in the southeast (azimuth c. 144°); the belt is just rising.
Save file as img/stellarium/P2-L.jpg
P2-L – Orion in the south – 2000 years later. Expectation 8000 BC: Orion stands on the horizon in the southeast (azimuth c. 144°); the belt is just rising.
P3-VOrion 8000 BC – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
10,000 BC (year −9999)
Time
belt on the meridian
View direction
south (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak 9.6°, Alnilam 10.3°, Mintaka 11.2° on the meridian
Test Expectation: the altitude differs by 10–20° from the main screen; the belt does not stand on the shaft angle of 45°.
Save file as img/stellarium/P3-V.jpg
P3-V – Orion 8000 BC – 2000 years earlier. Expectation: the altitude differs by 10–20° from the main screen; the belt does not stand on the shaft angle of 45°.
P3-LOrion 8000 BC – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
6000 BC (year −5999)
Time
belt on the meridian
View direction
south (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak 25.8°, Alnilam 26.0°, Mintaka 26.4° on the meridian
Test Expectation: the altitude differs by 10–20° from the main screen; the belt does not stand on the shaft angle of 45°.
Save file as img/stellarium/P3-L.jpg
P3-L – Orion 8000 BC – 2000 years later. Expectation: the altitude differs by 10–20° from the main screen; the belt does not stand on the shaft angle of 45°.
P4-VOrion 6000 BC – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
8000 BC (year −7999)
Time
belt on the meridian
View direction
south (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak 15.6°, Alnilam 16.0°, Mintaka 16.6° on the meridian
Test Expectation: the altitude differs by 10–20° from the main screen; the belt does not stand on the shaft angle of 45°.
Save file as img/stellarium/P4-V.jpg
P4-V – Orion 6000 BC – 2000 years earlier. Expectation: the altitude differs by 10–20° from the main screen; the belt does not stand on the shaft angle of 45°.
P4-LOrion 6000 BC – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
4000 BC (year −3999)
Time
belt on the meridian
View direction
south (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak 37.1°, Alnilam 37.3°, Mintaka 37.7° on the meridian
Test Expectation: the altitude differs by 10–20° from the main screen; the belt does not stand on the shaft angle of 45°.
Save file as img/stellarium/P4-L.jpg
P4-L – Orion 6000 BC – 2000 years later. Expectation: the altitude differs by 10–20° from the main screen; the belt does not stand on the shaft angle of 45°.
P5-VOrion 4000 BC – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
6000 BC (year −5999)
Time
belt on the meridian
View direction
south (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak 25.8°, Alnilam 26.0°, Mintaka 26.4° on the meridian
Test Expectation: the altitude differs by 10–20° from the main screen; the belt does not stand on the shaft angle of 45°.
Save file as img/stellarium/P5-V.jpg
P5-V – Orion 4000 BC – 2000 years earlier. Expectation: the altitude differs by 10–20° from the main screen; the belt does not stand on the shaft angle of 45°.
P5-LOrion 4000 BC – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
2000 BC (year −1999)
Time
belt on the meridian
View direction
south (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak 47.3°, Alnilam 47.7°, Mintaka 48.2° on the meridian
Test Expectation: the altitude differs by 10–20° from the main screen; the belt does not stand on the shaft angle of 45°.
Save file as img/stellarium/P5-L.jpg
P5-L – Orion 4000 BC – 2000 years later. Expectation: the altitude differs by 10–20° from the main screen; the belt does not stand on the shaft angle of 45°.
P6-VOrion 3000 BC – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
5000 BC (year −4999)
Time
belt on the meridian
View direction
south (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak 31.4°, Alnilam 31.7°, Mintaka 32.1° on the meridian
Test Expectation: the altitude differs by 10–20° from the main screen; the belt does not stand on the shaft angle of 45°.
Save file as img/stellarium/P6-V.jpg
P6-V – Orion 3000 BC – 2000 years earlier. Expectation: the altitude differs by 10–20° from the main screen; the belt does not stand on the shaft angle of 45°.
P6-LOrion 3000 BC – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
1000 BC (year −999)
Time
belt on the meridian
View direction
south (field of view c. 40°)
Expected in the image
  • Alnitak 51.5°, Alnilam 51.9°, Mintaka 52.5° on the meridian
Test Expectation: the altitude differs by 10–20° from the main screen; the belt does not stand on the shaft angle of 45°.
Save file as img/stellarium/P6-L.jpg
P6-L – Orion 3000 BC – 2000 years later. Expectation: the altitude differs by 10–20° from the main screen; the belt does not stand on the shaft angle of 45°.

13.2 A check against practice: how did the Egyptians orient their buildings?

All the claims above concern a single place. The strongest counter-argument is the look-elsewhere effect (9.1): whoever searches long enough finds something in any place. The best check is therefore a large, independent sample of Egyptian buildings measured by others. It exists: between 2004 and 2009 the Egyptian-Spanish mission of Belmonte and Shaltout measured the axes of more than 330 temples. tempel-orientaties-belmonte.csv contains 150 of them with a calculated declination, including 6 pyramid temples from the Old and Middle Kingdoms.

1. The pyramids of the Old Kingdom are aligned to the cardinal directions

Pyramid (temple)PlaceDynastyAzimuth of axisDeviation from east
KhufuGiza4th90,00°0,00°
KhafreGiza4th89,75°−0,25°
UserkafSaqqara5th90,25°+0,25°
SahureAbusir5th91,50°+1,50°
Sneferu SDahshur4th89,75°−0,25°
Amenemhat IEl Lisht12th91,75°+1,75°

Azimuth of the main axis of the pyramid temple according to Belmonte et al. (part 3), with a measurement error of c. ±½°. For the pyramid of Khufu itself Spence measures a deviation of less than 3 arcminutes (0.05°).

2. The temples after them do not

GroupNumber of axesWithin 2° of a cardinal directionMean deviation from the nearest cardinal directionExpected by chance
Pyramid temples (4th–12th dyn.)66 of 6 (max. 1.75°)0,67°4.4% per axis
Other temples (mainly New Kingdom and later)1444 of 144 (2.8%)27,5°4.4% per axis

“Expected by chance”: a random direction falls within 2° of one of the four cardinal directions with a probability of 4 × 4° / 360° = 4.4%. The later temples (2.8%) behave as chance predicts; they mainly follow the Nile (Belmonte 2005, fig. 3). That all six pyramid temples lie within 1.75° of east has a probability by chance of (14/360)6 ≈ 3.5 · 10−9. These six are not independent (one tradition, one method); that is exactly the point: it is a fixed practice, not a lucky hit.

3. Which celestial directions occur more often than chance?

Family, declination and explanation (Belmonte)Number (±1.5°)Expected by chanceFactorMeaning for this research
Winter solstice (rising)
−24.0°: Sun at −24°; highest peak in Belmonte
163,25.0×The sun is a target. But it is the winter solstice, not the summer solstice of 11.2.
Unexplained peak
−39.25°: only stars (α/β Cen, Southern Cross); no text
123,23.7×Shows that not every peak can be explained: a warning against searching afterwards.
Sirius (Sopdet)
−18.5°: within ±¾° of Sirius
63,21.9×Supports 11.3: Sirius is also a target in building practice.
Equinox / due east
0.0°: Sun at the equinox or the cardinal direction east
93,22.8×This is where all the pyramid temples of the Old Kingdom are (see table above).
Canopus
−53.25°: within the error of Canopus
63,21.9×Weak; identification of Canopus uncertain.
Vega
40.75°: within the error of Vega
63,21.9×Weak; identification of Vega uncertain.
Summer solstice (rising)
24.0°: Sun at +24°: “virtually absent” (Belmonte)
23,20.6×Counter-argument: the summer solstice of the working hypothesis (K1) is not a building orientation.

Count from the 150 axes in the csv file, band of 3° around the peak named by Belmonte and Shaltout (2005). “Expected” = uniform distribution over the measured range of 139° in declination (150 × 3 / 139 ≈ 3.2). A rough test: a factor of 2 at these numbers is not yet proof.

What this proves. (1) The Egyptians could and wanted to orient buildings on the sky; the ceremony of the “stretching of the cord” is depicted from the 2nd dynasty onwards (Belmonte 2005, pdf p. 1). (2) In the Old Kingdom that target is the cardinal direction, laid out with a precision never found again in later temples. Spence explains the method: the simultaneous meridian transit of Kochab and Mizar. (3) The sun (winter solstice) and Sirius are measurably more often the target than chance predicts. Those are exactly the two celestial bodies on which the strongest claims of this part (11.3, 11.4) rest.

What it does not prove. There is no family of temples aligned on Orion’s belt, on a circumpolar star or on the summer solstice. The last occurs less often than by chance: the summer solstice (K1, two days before New Year) is not a building orientation in 150 measured axes. Moreover, the temples are mainly from the New Kingdom, more than a thousand years after Khufu.

Assessment A Measurable and independent: the alignment of the pyramids to the cardinal directions is not chance, but a method. For the shafts and Orion this sample offers no support; for the sun and Sirius it does (level C/D).

Source: Shaltout & Belmonte 2005, pdf p. 1 pdf p. 10 pdf p. 11 Belmonte et al. 2010, pdf p. 1 Spence 2000, pdf p. 1 pdf p. 3 Belmonte 2001 (pyramids)

Why this check counts
These measurements were not made by this research and were not chosen to make Giza fit. They therefore have no degrees of freedom in the sense of 9.1: the outcome was fixed before the question was asked.

Spence: dating with the north alignment

Pyramids built one after another slowly turn away from true north: exactly what you would expect when using two stars that shift through precession. Spence calculates back to the year in which Kochab and Mizar stood directly above each other (2467 BC) and finds 2478 ± 5 BC for the Great Pyramid.

That is a second, independent astronomical dating. It lies c. 100 years later than this research’s 2580 BC. In 2478 BC the belt stands at 45.08° (Alnitak), 45.38° (Alnilam) and 45.88° (Mintaka): Alnitak and Alnilam lie within 0.15° of Petrie’s angle (45°14′). Thuban stands at 31.78° (+0.23° above the northern shaft), but Sirius is already 0.8° above the Queen’s Chamber southern shaft. Finding: Spence’s dating falls within the window of the King’s Chamber shafts, but just outside that of the three shafts together (2608–2572 BC, 13.3).

Note: Spence’s dating is disputed (Belmonte 2001, Nell & Ruggles 2014); other methods (sun, a single star) give comparable precision.

Stellarium screenshots: pole star, north alignment and the descending passage (N1–N3)

Calculated with Vondrák’s precession (2011), the same as Stellarium. The year of the plumb line (2467 BC) agrees exactly with Spence (2000), see above. N2 and N3 test the old idea that the descending passage pointed at Thuban.

N1Plumb line Mizar–Kochab (Spence’s method)screenshot missing
Date
14 February 2467 BC (year −2466)
Time
midnight solar time
View direction
north (0°), field of view c. 60°, equatorial grid on
Expected in the image
  • Mizar (Great Bear, the “Striker”) above the pole on the meridian: 41.6°
  • Kochab (Little Bear) directly below: 20.5°; celestial pole at 30.0°
  • The right ascensions of the two differ by exactly 180.0°: one vertical line through the pole
Test Drop a plumb line through Mizar. Does it pass through Kochab and the pole? In 2566 BC (end of Khufu’s reign) the difference is 175.0° and the line is skewed.
Save file as img/stellarium/N1.jpg
N1 – Plumb line Mizar–Kochab (Spence’s method). Drop a plumb line through Mizar. Does it pass through Kochab and the pole? In 2566 BC (end of Khufu’s reign) the difference is 175.0° and the line is skewed.
N2Descending passage and Thuban in 2580 BCscreenshot missing
Date
20 October 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
midnight solar time
View direction
north (0°), field of view c. 20°, atmosphere off
Expected in the image
  • Thuban on the meridian below the pole: 28.7°
  • The descending passage slopes at 26°31′ (26.5°): Thuban is 2.2° too high
Test Measure the altitude of Thuban at lower transit. Is it true that the passage did not point at Thuban in Khufu’s time?
Save file as img/stellarium/N2.jpg
N2 – Descending passage and Thuban in 2580 BC. Measure the altitude of Thuban at lower transit. Is it true that the passage did not point at Thuban in Khufu’s time?
N3Descending passage and Thuban in 2184 BCscreenshot missing
Date
17 October 2184 BC (year −2183)
Time
midnight solar time
View direction
north (0°), field of view c. 20°, atmosphere off
Expected in the image
  • Thuban at lower transit at 26.5°: exactly the slope of the descending passage
  • The same altitude in 3409 BC; these are the classic Thuban datings (Herschel, Petrie: c. 3440 and 2170 BC)
Test Confirm that the passage only points at Thuban c. 400 years after Khufu (or 800 years before). That is a finding against the passage as a star telescope.
Save file as img/stellarium/N3.jpg
N3 – Descending passage and Thuban in 2184 BC. Confirm that the passage only points at Thuban c. 400 years after Khufu (or 800 years before). That is a finding against the passage as a star telescope.

13.3 Statistics: how exceptional is the time of Khufu?

Test cardB
Claim
Of 33 stars chosen in advance, on the meridian three stand on the shaft angles at the same time in only two short periods of the whole precession cycle, and the longer of them is Khufu’s century; four at the same time (±0.5°) never. Off the meridian, at one moment, all four are filled at ±0.3° only once: 2460–2388 BC.
Measurement and error
Petrie’s angles; tested at three fixed margins (±0.3°, ±0.5° and ±1°), on the meridian and off the meridian (azimuth within 25° of the shaft direction).
Degrees of freedom
The list of 33 stars was fixed in advance (table 4); year and margin were not searched for. The azimuth window of 25° comes from the star clock (12.3).
Strongest counter-argument
With random bright stars two shafts are often filled at the same time (table 3). The choice of Petrie’s measurements helps determine the outcome. Off the meridian, a star at the altitude of a northern shaft is normal, and with all 470 stars to magnitude 3.9 the four shafts are filled simultaneously in half of the years (table 3).
Check
Calculated from 13,500 BC to AD 12,500 (26,000 years), year by year.

This section delivers findings in tables. The reference year 2580 BC was chosen because it falls in Khufu’s reign. The question is the reverse: in which years of the whole precession cycle do the stars stand on Petrie’s angles, and how often does that happen?

We count in two ways. On the meridian: the star stands directly above the shaft (due south or north) on the angle; that is the strictest test. Off the meridian: the star reaches the altitude of the shaft while within 25° of the shaft direction, as with the star clock (12.3). In this way all stars that reach the altitude of a shaft count, even if they do not stand directly above it. In both ways we use all 33 stars chosen in advance, and Mizar is always included at both northern shafts.

1. Per shaft: which stars stand on the angle?

ShaftStar (chosen in advance)Meridian ±0.3°Meridian ±0.5°Meridian ±1.0°Off the meridian ±0.5°
King’s Chamber south (45°14′)Alnitak2508–2386 BC2548–2344 BC2650–2240 BC2548–1610 BC
Alnilam2568–2448 BC2608–2408 BC2706–2304 BC2606–1694 BC
Mintaka2662–2546 BC2702–2506 BC2798–2406 BC2700–1814 BC
Betelgeuse4380–4276 BC4416–4240 BCuntil 4150 BC4414–3640 BC
Rigel708–552 BCfrom 760 BCfrom 886 BCfrom 758 BC
Bellatrix3704–3600 BC3740–3564 BC3830–3474 BC3740–2958 BC
Saiph880–698 BC938–634 BCfrom 1082 BCfrom 936 BC
Aldebaran———until 4058 BC
Antares1074–958 BC1112–920 BC1208–820 BC1736–920 BC
Queen’s Chamber south (38°28′)Alnitak3804–3696 BC3840–3660 BC3932–3568 BC3838–2936 BC
Alnilam3846–3738 BC3882–3702 BC3972–3612 BC3880–2988 BC
Mintaka3922–3816 BC3956–3780 BC4046–3688 BC3956–3074 BC
Rigel2234–2114 BC2274–2072 BC2374–1968 BC2274–1234 BC
Bellatrix———until 4086 BC
Saiph2550–2422 BC2592–2378 BC2698–2268 BC2590–1470 BC
Sirius2806–2628 BC2866–2564 BC3008–2404 BC2862–1026 BC
Antares———from 528 BC
King’s Chamber north (31°33′)Thuban3128–3024; 2572–2468 BC3164–2988; 2608–2432 BC3252–2900; 2696–2342 BCuntil 2988; from 2608 BC
Kochab———the whole period
Pherkad———the whole period
Polaris———from 1822 BC
Dubhe———from 3154 BC
Merak———1826–1234 BC
Phecda———3596–1036 BC
Megrez———the whole period
Alioth———the whole period
Mizar———the whole period
Alkaid———until 1528 BC
5 Dra———the whole period
Edasich———the whole period
Aldhibah———the whole period
Queen’s Chamber north (37°28′)Thuban4180–4074; 1518–1412 BC4216–4038; 1554–1376 BC4304–3950; 1642–1286 BCuntil 4038; from 1554 BC
Kochab1938–1684 BC2010–1578; from 542 BCfrom 2180 BCuntil 1578; from 544 BC
Pherkad———the whole period
Polaris———from 1942 BC
Dubhe———from 3290 BC
Merak———2278–780 BC
Phecda———3778–854 BC
Megrez———the whole period
Alioth———the whole period
Mizar———the whole period
Alkaid———until 1414 BC
5 Dra2322–2198 BC2364–2156 BC2464–2042; from 564 BCuntil 2156 BC
Edasich3714–3552 BC3770–3500 BC3922–3374 BCfrom 3770 BC
Aldhibah———the whole period

Period 4500–500 BC, every 2 years. All stars from the list of 33 that reach a shaft in that period; in bold: the stars of the original test (belt, Sirius, Saiph, Thuban) and Mizar. Meridian: altitude at transit through the meridian (southern shafts above the south, northern shafts above the north). Off the meridian: the star reaches the shaft altitude somewhere within 25° of the shaft direction. 29.975° N, geometric, Vondrák precession (2011) with proper motion. Over the whole cycle of 26,000 years a star on the meridian usually stands on a shaft angle 1.4–2.4% of the time (±0.5°); off the meridian that is 6–19% for the southern stars and up to 36% for the northern ones.

What the table shows. On the meridian the King’s Chamber northern shaft has only one star, Thuban: at 31°33′ only a star close to the pole can stand due north. If we include all stars that reach that altitude, 14 stand on this shaft, eight of them (Kochab, Pherkad, Megrez, Alioth, Mizar, 5 Dra, Edasich and Aldhibah) throughout the period. Mizar never reaches a northern shaft on the meridian (at best 2.5° above the Queen’s Chamber northern angle, in 3385 BC; it misses the King’s Chamber northern angle by 8.4° or more), but off the meridian it reaches the altitude of both northern shafts once a day from 4500 to 500 BC. The southern shafts also get much wider windows off the meridian: the belt then stands at the King’s Chamber southern altitude from 2700 to 1610 BC. So off the meridian, one star per shaft no longer dates anything; only the moment at which all shafts have a star at the same time can do that (tables 2 and 4).

2. Combinations: how often are several shafts filled at the same time?

CombinationMargin ±0.3°Margin ±0.5°Margin ±1.0°
Orion + Sirius (both southern shafts)2665–2634 BC
32 years = 0.12% · 1× in the cycle
2705–2572 BC
134 years = 0.52% · 1×
2802–2411 BC
392 years = 1.51% · 1×
Orion + Thuban (both King’s Chamber)2572–2467 BC
106 years = 0.41% · 1×
2608–2431 BC
178 years = 0.68% · 1×
2697–2342 BC
356 years = 1.37% · 1×
Orion + Sirius + Thubannever2608–2572 BC
37 years = 0.14% · 1×
2697–2411 BC
287 years = 1.10% · 1×
Orion (belt or Saiph) + Sirius or Saiph + Thuban2550–2467 BC
84 years · 1×
2608–2431 BC
178 years = 0.68% · 1×
2697–2342 BC
356 years · 1×
All four (with Kochab)nevernevernever
Any star from the list, on the meridian: three shafts3704–3696 and 2550–2468 BC3740–3660 and 2608–2432 BC3830–3568 and 2696–2240 BC; three short periods AD
Any star from the list, on the meridian: all fournevernever2464–2342 BC · 1×
Any star from the list, off the meridian, at the same moment: three shafts9.9% of the cycle16,9%27,9%
Any star from the list, off the meridian, at the same moment: all four2460–2388 BC
0.12% · 1×
2.7% · 6×: 4842–4686, 3552–3526, 3238–3086, 2546–2264 and 2226–2190 BC; AD 425–48511.2% · 8×, incl. 3784–2996 and 2652–2010 BC

“1×”: the combination occurs in only one continuous period in 26,000 years. With the Upuaut angles (7.3) the window for all four lay at 2438–2390 BC (±0.5°); with Petrie’s, Kochab drops out and the window of the other three shifts to 2608–2572 BC. “At the same moment”: within one and the same minute of the day each named shaft has a star (per 2 years, per 0.25° of rotation of the sky). On the meridian that is impossible, because each star crosses the meridian at its own time.

Explanation. Off the meridian two or three filled shafts at the same time are normal, but all four at one moment remains rare: at ±0.3° once in 26,000 years, with the belt (Alnilam or Alnitak), Saiph, Kochab and Phecda or Megrez. At ±0.5° the longest period is 2546–2264 BC, with the same four (belt, Saiph, Kochab and the Great Bear or 5 Dra). Mizar belongs to the two older periods (4842–4686 BC in the Queen’s Chamber northern shaft, 3552–3526 BC in the King’s Chamber northern shaft). During Khufu’s own reign three shafts are always filled at the same time off the meridian (±0.5°), four from 2546 BC; at ±1° there are already four in 2580 BC (the star clock, 12.3).

Three and four shafts at the same time. For each shaft the best-fitting star from all 33 (on the meridian). The deepest trough of the whole cycle lies in 2504 BC: Alnilam, Saiph and Thuban all three within 0.09°. On the meridian all four together never come closer than 0.68° (2400 BC). Dotted: the old test with Orion, Sirius and Thuban (smallest deviation 0.41° in 2592 BC).
Finding

With Petrie’s measurements, Orion, Sirius and Thuban stand within half a degree of their shaft at the same time only once in 26,000 years: from 2608 to 2572 BC, the beginning of Khufu’s reign. If we include Saiph (Orion’s knee), that period continues until 2432 BC. Even with all 33 stars chosen in advance, this remains the only long period with three filled shafts (table 4). Off the meridian, at one moment, all four shafts are filled at ±0.3° only once in the cycle: 2460–2388 BC, with Orion (belt and Saiph), Kochab and the Great Bear.

3. Counter-test: random bright stars

Star listResultWhat it means
3 stars chosen in advance (Orion, Sirius, Thuban)all three at the same time: only 2608–2572 BC (±0.5°); never at ±0.3°rare: one period of 37 years in the whole cycle
110 brightest stars, ±0.3°4500 BC – start of the era, per 10 years: two of the three shafts filled in 89 of the 450 decades (20%); all three neverwith free choice of stars two filled shafts are normal
110 brightest stars, ±0.5°same: two of the three shafts filled in 170 of the 450 decades (38%); all three neverwith a wider margin even more normal
470 stars to magnitude 3.9, on the meridian (four shafts)whole cycle, per 50 years: three shafts in 24% (±0.3°) and 41% (±0.5°) of the years; four in 0% and 1%on the meridian four filled shafts remain exceptional even with many stars
470 stars to magnitude 3.9, off the meridian, at the same momentall four at the same time in 50% (±0.3°) and 87% (±0.5°) of the yearsoff the meridian a full set of shafts is normal with a free choice of stars; only with the list chosen in advance is it rare

Catalogue: the 110 brightest stars from the Bright Star Catalogue. Shafts: King’s Chamber south and north and Queen’s Chamber south. That all three never succeed is also because on the meridian only Thuban stands at the King’s Chamber northern angle, and it is not among the 110 brightest. The rows with 470 stars count all four shafts, every 50 years over the whole cycle, with the same margins and the same azimuth window (25°) as above.

4. The broad test: all 33 stars chosen in advance over the whole cycle

MarginThree shafts with a star at the same timeAll fourShare of the cycle with ≥ 2 shafts
±0,3°3704–3696 BC; 2550–2468 BCnever5,0%
±0,5°3740–3660 BC; 2608–2432 BCnever12,8%
±1°3830–3568 BC; 2696–2240 BC; AD 591–701; AD 2521–2551; AD 10,483–10,8552464–2342 BC38,2%
Off the meridian, at the same moment (azimuth within 25°)
±0,3°9.9% of the cycle (incl. 3744–3456 and 2626–2220 BC)2460–2388 BC (1×)56,7%
±0,5°16,9%4842–4686, 3552–3526, 3238–3086, 2546–2264, 2226–2190 BC; AD 425–48567,0%
±1°27,9%11.2% of the cycle, incl. 2652–2010 BC80,1%

All 33 stars of 12.1 (Trimble, Badawy, Bauval, Spence, all of Orion, the Great and Little Bear, the northern stars from a first exploration and all other stars from this book), tested on all four shafts, at their meridian transit, every 2 years from 13,500 BC to AD 12,500. Off the meridian: counted per 2 years and per minute of the day which shafts have a star at the same moment.

With the full list the picture does not change: the only long period with three filled shafts is that of the pyramid builders (at ±0.5°: 2608–2432 BC, the belt or Saiph, Sirius or Saiph, and Thuban). A second, short period around 3700 BC comes from Bellatrix, the belt in the Queen’s Chamber southern shaft and Edasich. Four shafts at the same time only succeeds on the meridian at ±1°, and then only in 2464–2342 BC.

Off the meridian the picture changes strongly per shaft: the King’s Chamber northern shaft then has 14 stars instead of only Thuban, and Mizar stands at the altitude of both northern shafts throughout the period (graph, light bars). What remains as a test is the moment at which all four have a star at the same time. At ±0.3° that happens only once in the cycle, in 2460–2388 BC, more than a hundred years after the reference year and in the time of Khufu’s successors. At ±0.5° there are six periods, the longest of which is 2546–2264 BC. With all 470 stars to magnitude 3.9 such a moment is normal (table 3); the outcome therefore depends on the list chosen in advance.

All 33 stars through the centuries. For each shaft the stars that stand within 1° of it, 4500–500 BC: dark on the meridian, light off the meridian (azimuth within 25°); Mizar at both northern shafts. Top: the number of filled shafts, on the meridian (four only in 2464–2342 BC) and off the meridian at the same moment (four incl. in 2652–2010 BC).

5. Datings side by side

Source or methodOutcome
Conventional chronology (king lists)Khufu c. 2589–2566 BC (reference year 2580)
Three shafts together (Petrie, ±0.5°)2608–2572 BC; smallest combined deviation in 2584 BC (0.34°)
Same with Petrie’s own estimate of the whole length (44½° and 31°)belt 2749–2596 BC; Thuban 2617 BC
Best three shafts, all 33 stars (meridian)2504 BC: Alnilam, Saiph and Thuban all within 0.09°
All four at the same time, off the meridian (±0.3°)2460–2388 BC: belt, Saiph, Kochab, Phecda or Megrez (±0.5°: 2546–2264 BC)
Spence 2000: Mizar and Kochab as a plumb line2478 ± 5 BC (N1: line exactly through the pole in 2467 BC)
Descending passage on Thuban (N2, N3)3409 and 2184 BC, not in the 4th dynasty
Midnights with two northern shafts filled (12.3)peak around 2340 BC; does not date the construction

The meridian test of three shafts and the king lists coincide; the tests with all stars (best three on the meridian, all four off the meridian) lie 75 to 190 years later, around Spence’s dating. Spence lies c. 100 years later; in 2478 BC the belt (Alnitak 45.08°) and Thuban (31.78°) still stand on their angle, but Sirius is already 0.8° too high.

Source: own calculation (Vondrák precession, proper motion) · Petrie 1883, §44 · Petrie 1883, §56 · Spence 2000, pdf p. 3 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 43

Chapter 14 Myths, stars and buildings

Where a text, a celestial phenomenon and a building tell the same story: the Duat, the morning star, the gods at the turning points of the year, and the way back from god to year.

14.1 Myths, stars and buildings: how do they work together?

The Pyramid Texts are the oldest source that names stars and gods together. This section looks for the places where a text, a celestial phenomenon and a building describe the same event. Each link has a calculation, a source and (where possible) a Stellarium screenshot for checking.

1. The Duat as invisibility: 70 days

“Orion has become encircled by the Duat … Sothis has become encircled by the Duat” Allen 2005, pdf p. 43. A star that stands close to the Sun is invisible for weeks: in the language of the texts it is in the Duat, the netherworld. Allen himself gives “some seventy days” for Sirius pdf p. 452.

Star (god)Last evening visibleFirst morning visibleDays in the DuatScreenshot
Alnilam, belt (Orion/Osiris)17 April 2580 BC19 June62 (60–65)M3
Sirius (Sothis/Isis)4 May 2580 BC (M1)17 July (M2, New Year)73 nights; from contact point to contact point 71.6 days (67–76, see 14.1a)M1, M2
Sirius in 3580 / 1580 BC30 April / 7 May17 July / 17 July77 / 70—

Visible = star at least 2° high with the Sun at −8°; in brackets the outcome at the limits −6°/3° to −10°/1°. For Sirius in 2580 BC the dates of screenshots M1 and M2 and the exact contact points from 14.1a are given. Julian dates, ±1 day. Own calculation (Vondrák, sun according to Meeus).

  • The order agrees with the text. Orion (Osiris) returns 28 days earlier than Sothis (Isis). The spell names them in that order.
  • Embalming. The king’s body is “in the Duat” while it is being embalmed. The 70 days of embalming come from much later sources (Herodotus); for the Old Kingdom the duration has not been established. According to the literature the tomb inscription of Meresankh III (4th dynasty, Giza) gives 272 days between death and burial.
  • Decans. In the much younger Book of Nut each decan stays 70 days in the Duat (Neugebauer & Parker 1960) Decan, pdf p. 1.

2. His sister Sothis and the Morning Star

“His sister is Sothis, his female sibling is the Morning Star” Allen 2005, pdf p. 59; elsewhere Nut gives birth to “her daughter the morning star … the third (companion) of Sothis” pdf p. 166. Was there also a morning star at New Year (heliacal rising of Sirius, 17 July)? Venus follows an 8-year cycle:

Year in Khufu’s reignVenus as morning star on 17 July
2589 BC19.6° west of the Sun
2586 BC36.5° west of the Sun
2583 BC46.1° west of the Sun
2581 BC19.0° west of the Sun
2578 BC36.0° west of the Sun
2575 BC46.1° west of the Sun
2573 BC18.4° west of the Sun
2570 BC35.5° west of the Sun
2567 BC46.1° west of the Sun

9 of the 24 regnal years (2589–2566 BC) have a morning star at New Year (Venus more than 10° west of the Sun). Not in the reference year 2580: Venus is then 7.9° from the Sun. Planetary positions with PyEphem (VSOP87), indicative: check with Stellarium (M4). Finding: a morning star with Sothis is normal (3 in 8 years) and dates nothing, but the image of the text did exist.

How the parts work together

Put the calculations side by side and a single story of the year emerges:

  1. 17 April–19 June: Orion (Osiris) in the Duat.
  2. 4 May–17 July: Sothis (Isis) in the Duat; on 10 May the Sun stands in the Milky Way (11.5).
  3. 19 June: Osiris returns.
  4. 15 July: summer solstice, Sun in the notch of Akhet-Khufu (E3).
  5. 17 July: return of Sothis: new year, start of the inundation (M2).
  6. 2–17 Nov: Osiris at midnight in the southern shaft of the King’s Chamber (PT1 in 12.4b); on 8 November the Sun is back in the Milky Way, at the causeway line (11.5); on 13 November the Sun is above the causeway (K3).
  7. 25 Nov–17 Dec: Isis at midnight in the southern shaft of the Queen’s Chamber.

This is a coherence that the calculations show. Whether the builders intended it this way remains an interpretation (level D).

Assessment D The texts and the sky fit strikingly well on a number of points (Orion out of the Duat before Sothis, 70 days, Sothis at new year). Screenshots M1–M5 and N1–N3 belong with this.

Source: Allen 2005, pdf p. 18 Allen 2005, pdf p. 20 Allen 2005, pdf p. 43 Allen 2005, pdf p. 59 Allen 2005, pdf p. 91 Allen 2005, pdf p. 166 Allen 2005, pdf p. 452 Allen 2005, pdf p. 453 Belmonte 2005, pdf p. 1 Neugebauer & Parker 1960

Calculation: Sirius in the Duat, from 4 May to 17 July (71.6 days)

From the last evening on which Sirius can be seen (4 May, M1) to the first morning on which it is back (17 July, M2) there are 74 days: 27 days in May after the 4th, 30 in June and 17 in July (Julian calendar, year −2579). Sirius is therefore invisible for 73 nights, from 5 May up to and including 16 July.

Counting whole nights is crude: a star does not disappear at a fixed hour. We therefore also calculated the exact crossing point: the moment at which the line of Sirius in the graph crosses the visibility limit of 2° (Sun at −8°). In the evening that crossing lies half a day after the evening of 5 May, in the morning 0.7 day after the morning of 16 July. Between them lie 71.6 days. With a different limit the crossing point shifts:

Visibility limitCrossing, eveningCrossing, morningDays between the crossings
Sun −6°, Sirius 2°7 May + 0.5 d14 July + 0.3 d67,2
Sun −8°, Sirius 1°6 May + 0.8 d15 July + 0.4 d69,0
Sun −8°, Sirius 2° (our standard)5 May + 0.5 d16 July + 0.7 d71,6
Sun −8°, Sirius 3°4 May + 0.3 d17 July + 1.0 d74,1
Sun −10°, Sirius 2°3 May + 0.4 d19 July + 0.3 d76,3
Screenshots M1 and M2 (whole days)4 May17 July74 (73 nights)

Explanation: for every evening and morning in 2580 BC (Julian dates, Giza) we calculated the moment at which the Sun stands at −6°, −8° or −10°, and the altitude of Sirius at that moment. In the evening that altitude drops by about 0.8° per day, and in the morning it rises just as fast. The crossing point is the moment at which the line between two consecutive evenings (or mornings) crosses the limit; “+ 0.5 d” means half a day after that evening or morning. The last column is the difference between the two crossings in days. Own calculation: Vondrák precession and proper motion of Sirius (Bright Star Catalogue), Sun with PyEphem, refraction included. The bottom row counts whole days between the two screenshots.

  • Which time of year. Sirius is gone from early May to mid-July. It returns around the summer solstice: on 15 July 2580 BC the Sun is at ecliptic longitude 90°, the longest day of the year (see Z2 in 14.2). The first morning with Sirius (17 July) falls two days later.
  • The number 70. From crossing to crossing, reasonable limits give 67 to 76 days, with 71.6 days at our standard limit. The number 70 from the texts fits within that range, but the calculation cannot pin it down to the day.

Source: Allen 2005, pdf p. 452 · own calculation

Sirius in the Duat: 71.6 days. The altitude of Sirius when the Sun is at −8°: in the evening in the west (navy) it sinks below the 2° limit in early May, in the morning in the east (brick) it returns in mid-July. The diamonds are the crossing points with the limit; between them lie 71.6 days (the light area). The band shows the Sun between −6° and −10° (67.2 to 76.3 days). The circles are screenshots M1 (4 May) and M2 (17 July).

Stellarium screenshots: myths in the sky (M1–M5)

M1 and M2 show the last evening and the first morning of Sirius (14.1a), M3 the return of Orion, M4 the morning star and M5 the Sun in the Milky Way. Dates are Julian, times in apparent solar time; set the time by the altitude of the Sun, as with the other screenshots.

M1Sirius disappears into the Duatscreenshot missing
Date
4 May 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
evening twilight, Sun at −8° (approx. 18:57 solar time)
View direction
west-southwest (azimuth approx. 243°), atmosphere on
Expected in the image
  • Sirius low in the west, approx. 2–4° high: the last evening on which it can be seen
  • Next visibility: 17 July in the morning (M2). From crossing to crossing with the visibility limit: 71.6 days (67–76 depending on the limit, see the calculation below)
Test Step forward one day at a time until Sirius no longer rises above 2° in the twilight, and count the days to M2.
Save file as img/stellarium/M1.jpg
M1 – Sirius disappears into the Duat. 4 May 2580 BC, 18:39 (Stellarium, local time): Sirius 5.8° high in the west-southwest (azimuth 241°), the Sun at −4.9°. Step forward one day at a time until Sirius no longer rises above 2° in the twilight, and count the days to M2.
M2Sirius returns from the Duatscreenshot missing
Date
17 July 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
morning twilight, approx. 04:32 (Sun at −4.3°)
View direction
east-southeast (azimuth approx. 118°), atmosphere on
Expected in the image
  • Sirius low in the east-southeast, approx. 5–6° high: the first morning on which it is visible again before the Sun
  • Two days after the summer solstice (15 July)
  • Venus above the Sun in the east-northeast
Test Count the days from M1 (4 May): a difference of 74 days, 73 nights without Sirius.
Save file as img/stellarium/M2.jpg
M2 – Sirius returns from the Duat. 17 July 2580 BC, 04:32 (Stellarium, local time): Sirius 5.7° high in the east-southeast (azimuth 118°), the Sun at −4.3°. Because of the thick layer of air near the horizon (9.3 air masses) Sirius is dimmed from magnitude −1.43 to −0.22, but still clearly visible. Venus stands above the Sun. From M1 to M2: a difference of 74 days, 73 nights without Sirius.
M3Orion returns from the Duatscreenshot missing
Date
19 June 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
morning twilight, Sun at −8° (approx. 04:26 solar time)
View direction
east (azimuth approx. 108°), atmosphere on
Expected in the image
  • Alnilam (middle of the belt) just above the horizon, approx. 1–2°
  • Invisible since 17 April: 62 days
  • Sirius still invisible; it follows 28 days later (17 July, M2)
Test Count the days from the last evening (17 April) to this morning. Does Orion return before Sothis, in the order the Pyramid Text names them?
Save file as img/stellarium/M3.jpg
M3 – Orion returns from the Duat. Count the days from the last evening (17 April) to this morning. Does Orion return before Sothis, in the order the Pyramid Text names them?
M4Venus as morning star at new yearscreenshot missing
Date
17 July 2583 BC (year −2582)
Time
morning twilight, Sun at −8° (approx. 04:17 solar time)
View direction
east (azimuth 60–120°), field of view approx. 70°
Expected in the image
  • Venus high in the east: approx. 26° altitude, azimuth approx. 89°, magnitude −4.3, 46° from the Sun
  • Sirius just above the horizon (azimuth 115°): “sister Sothis and the morning star” together
Test Repeat for 17 July 2580 BC: Venus is then 7.9° from the Sun and cannot be seen. Complete the table in 14.1 with the years Stellarium gives.
Save file as img/stellarium/M4.jpg
M4 – Venus as morning star at new year. Repeat for 17 July 2580 BC: Venus is then 7.9° from the Sun and cannot be seen. Complete the table in 14.1 with the years Stellarium gives.
M5The Sun in the Milky Way (Nut, exploratory)screenshot missing
Date
8 November 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
Sun at −8° before sunrise; switch off the atmosphere to see the Milky Way
View direction
east-southeast (azimuth approx. 110°), field of view approx. 90°, Milky Way on
Expected in the image
  • The Sun stands on the galactic equator (ecliptic longitude 206°): the rising out of the Milky Way
  • The same on 10 May (ecliptic longitude 26°)
  • That night Orion stands in the southern shaft at midnight (12.3)
Test Does the Sun rise “out of the body” of the Milky Way? This tests the hypothesis Nut = Milky Way; the Pyramid Texts themselves call the pyramid Nut, not the Milky Way.
Save file as img/stellarium/M5.jpg
M5 – The Sun in the Milky Way (Nut, exploratory). Does the Sun rise “out of the body” of the Milky Way? This tests the hypothesis Nut = Milky Way; the Pyramid Texts themselves call the pyramid Nut, not the Milky Way.Note: at 6:42 (8 November 2580 BC) the Sun stands exactly in the Milky Way, above the causeway, at azimuth 105.00°. The figures for this morning and for 10 May are in 11.5.

14.2 The Sun at the turning points: Taurus, Leo, Scorpius and Aquarius

Test cardD
Claim
In Khufu’s time the Sun stood at the four turning points of the year near Taurus, Leo, the head of Scorpius and Aquarius; the gods of those figures fit the moment of the year.
Measurement and error
Spring equinox: Sun 3.3° past the Pleiades, 6.4° before Aldebaran. Summer solstice: 3.2° past Regulus. Autumn equinox: 0.2° from Acrab (head of Scorpius). Winter solstice: 0.0° from Fomalhaut and 0.1° from Sadalmelik (ecliptic longitude).
Degrees of freedom
Many bright stars along the ecliptic: a random point has a 15% chance of lying within 1° of a star up to magnitude 2.9 (within 12° of the ecliptic). Which god belongs to which figure is partly a choice.
Strongest counter-argument
The zodiac is Mesopotamian; that the Egyptians of the Old Kingdom saw a bull, a lion and a scorpion in the sky rests on later sources.
Check
PT3 (14.2c), Z1–Z4 with check -V/-L; graph with the Sun at the turning points in 4580, 2580 and 580 BC.

In earlier explorations of the period around 10,000 BC the four turning points of the year seemed neatly distributed over recognisable figures: the Bull in March (Hathor, fertility), the Scorpion in September (death). How does that work out in Khufu’s time? Precession has shifted the turning points by approx. 105° since then (2.8), so the figures are different. But in 2580 BC each of the four turning points falls on or close to a bright star, and three of them near an animal that is a sun god or a god of the dead in the Egyptian pantheon (5.7).

Turning point (2580 BC)Date Julian / GregorianWhere is the Sun?God with this imageWhat the texts say about that godLevel
Spring equinox12 April / 22 MarchIn the head of Taurus: 3.3° past the Pleiades, 6.4° before Aldebaran (the eye)Hathor and the Apis bull: the sun disk between the hornsthe king is “the eye on the brow of Hathor, who turns back the years” (pdf p. 103); Hathor with sun disk on the statues of Menkaure (Giza)D
Summer solstice (new year 2 days later)15 July / 24 JuneAt the heart of Leo: 3.2° past RegulusSekhmet, the lioness with the sun disk; the Sphinx; the lions of the horizonthe king is begotten by Sekhmet and appears “as the morning star” (pdf p. 53); on the same mornings Sirius returnsD
Autumn equinox13 October / 22 SeptemberOn the head of Scorpius: 0.2° from Acrab, 6.4° before Antares (the heart)Selket, the scorpion goddessdaughter of Osiris and one of the four goddesses who mourn him (pdf p. 451); later: Osiris dies “when the Sun passes through the Scorpion” (Berio, pdf p. 25)D
Winter solstice10 January / 19 DecemberIn Aquarius: 0.1° from Sadalmelik; at the same longitude Fomalhaut (Southern Fish)Hapy, the god of the inundation (as Aquarius only on later zodiacs)the inundation (“Inundation”) comes “between July and October” and is a manifestation of Osiris (pdf p. 445); the winter solstice is the direction that occurs most often in temples (13.2)E

Ecliptic longitude of that time (Vondrák precession, proper motion). Constellation boundaries according to the modern division, shifted for precession; the Egyptian figures may have had different boundaries.

What stands out?

  • The two sun gods with a disk between the horns or on the head, Hathor/Apis and Sekhmet, belong to the two moments at which the year begins anew: the spring (the Sun “in the horns of the bull”) and the summer solstice with the new year two days later (the Sun “in the lion”). According to the text, Hathor “turns back the years”.
  • The scorpion belongs to dying. At the autumn equinox the Sun begins the dark half of the year, and it then stands exactly on the head of Scorpius. Selket mourns Osiris. In the same weeks (2–17 November) Osiris (Orion) stands in the southern shaft at midnight (12.3), and on 13 November Antares, the heart of Scorpius, is the first to rise again before the Sun (D3).
  • The month of Hathor. According to Plutarch the death of Osiris was commemorated in the month of Athyr, the month of Hathor, “when the Sun passes through the Scorpion”. A late source, but it places the same three names side by side.
  • The ram in the morning. On the morning of the spring equinox Hamal, the star of Aries, stands 15° high above the Sphinx (D6). The ram is the animal of Khnum, the god in the king’s full name: Khnum-Khufu, “Khnum protects me”. The ram with the sun disk (Amun-Ra) only comes much later; this connection is speculation (E).

Leo and Aquarius: the two sides of the inundation

Leo and the Sphinx. At the summer solstice of 2580 BC the Sun stands near Regulus, the heart of Leo, and in the evening Regulus sets almost together with the Sun (−3.4° at sunset). At new year, two days later, the Sun stands more than 5° past Regulus (−4.9° at sunset). Precisely then the water starts to rise. Much later Horapollo (5th century AD) writes that the Egyptians placed lion heads as waterspouts on their temples “because the Nile rises when the Sun is in Leo”; such lion heads can still be seen on the temples of Dendera and Edfu. The Sphinx, a lion looking out over the valley, lies on the edge of the land that flooded every year. That is a late source and our own connection, but lion and inundation clearly belong together in Egypt.

Aquarius and Hapy. On the later Egyptian zodiacs (Dendera) Aquarius is a figure pouring water from two jars, like Hapy, the god of the Nile inundation. Does more water flow through the Nile around the winter solstice? No. The inundation comes “between July and October” (Allen, pdf p. 445); in December and January the water falls, and in spring the Nile is at its lowest (3.4). In Khufu’s time Aquarius belongs to the water in a different way: on the evening of the summer solstice, 15 July 2580 BC, Sadalmelik in Aquarius rises while the Sun sets (6.8° high at sunset, azimuth 109°; at new year, 17 July, 8.4°), and it stays in the sky all night, precisely in the weeks when the water comes. 2000 years earlier it already stood 30° high at sunset, 2000 years later it had not yet risen (Z5). At midnight it stands on the meridian: in the night of the solstice, two nights before new year, Sadalmelik culminates at 23:58 apparent solar time at 47.1° due south, with Fomalhaut, the bright star of the Southern Fish, below it at 15.6° (NY1 in 14.2b). That is no coincidence of that one night: Sadalmelik stands at ecliptic longitude 270°, the winter point (Z4), and at the summer solstice that point always stands in the south at midnight, opposite the Sun. For the shafts it does not count at that moment: 47.1° lies 1.8° above the King’s Chamber southern shaft (45°14′). In the north Kochab (Little Bear) then stands at 37.4°, the altitude of the Queen’s Chamber northern shaft, off the meridian (azimuth 8°). A Roman tradition puts it this way: the Nile overflows its banks “when Aquarius sets his jar in the river”.

So all four turning points have a fitting god: Hathor and Taurus at spring, Sekhmet, Leo and the Sphinx at the solstice, the new year and the flood, Selket and Scorpius in autumn, and Hapy and Aquarius, which rises with the setting Sun around the solstice and new year and carries the Sun in winter. The two mornings on which the Sun stands in the Milky Way, with the figures of life (10 May) and of death and the Nile (8 November), are in 11.5.

What does the other side say?

  • The zodiac is younger. The twelve figures were fixed in Mesopotamia; for Egypt in the Old Kingdom only Orion, Sirius and the Great Bear are certain (11.3). Berio holds that bull, lion and scorpion were Egyptian early on (pdf p. 55); that is one author.
  • Chance. A random point of the ecliptic has a 15% chance of lying within 1° of a bright star (up to magnitude 2.9, within 12° of the ecliptic). That two of the four turning points do so (autumn and winter) is striking but not exceptional.
  • Leo holds for many centuries. At the summer solstice the Sun has stood in Leo since approx. 4000 BC (graph: 4580 BC). Only the proximity of Regulus (within 3.5°: approx. 2590–2090 BC) is specific.

Source: Allen 2005, pdf p. 53 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 103 · Allen 2005, pdf p. 451 · Berio 2014, pdf p. 25 · Berio 2014, pdf p. 55

The Sun at the four turning points. Where the Sun stood at the spring equinox, the summer solstice, the autumn equinox and the winter solstice, in 4580, 2580 and 580 BC. In 2580 BC: in Taurus, near Regulus, on the head of Scorpius and in Aquarius.
Hathor. Sun disk between the horns: the spring.
The Apis bull. The bull too carries the sun disk.
Selket. The scorpion on her head: the autumn.
B14-1Hathor triad of Menkaureimage still to be found

What it should show one of the statue groups of Menkaure from his valley temple at Giza, with Hathor (sun disk between cow horns) beside the king.

Why here this is the oldest image of a god with the sun disk on the plateau itself, from the 4th dynasty.

Search term Menkaure triad Hathor sun disk Cairo Museum Boston
Save as img/jpg/b14-1.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.
B14-3The Sphinx beneath Leoimage still to be found

What it should show a photo or montage of the Sphinx with the constellation Leo (Regulus) above it, or a lion-head waterspout from the temple of Dendera or Edfu.

Why here at the solstice and new year the Sun stood near Regulus; lion and inundation belong together (Horapollo).

Search term Sphinx Leo constellation night / Dendera lion head waterspout
Save as img/jpg/b14-3.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.
B14-4Aquarius as Hapyimage still to be found

What it should show the figure of Aquarius on the round zodiac of Dendera (a man pouring water from two jars), next to an image of the Nile god Hapy.

Why here this gives Aquarius its god: Hapy, the inundation, who appears in the evening sky with Sadalmelik around new year.

Search term Dendera zodiac Aquarius Hapi water jars
Save as img/jpg/b14-4.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.
Fish with sun disk. The winter: Fomalhaut, the mouth of the Southern Fish, at the longitude of the Sun. The origin and date of this figurine have not been established.
B14-5The Southern Fish with Fomalhautimage still to be found

What it should show the constellation Southern Fish (Piscis Austrinus) below Aquarius, with Fomalhaut as the bright star in the fish’s mouth; preferably an old star-atlas drawing with the fish drinking the water of Aquarius.

Why here at the winter solstice of 2580 BC the Sun stands at the longitude of Fomalhaut (0.0°); this is the fourth moment beside Taurus, Leo and Scorpius. Note: img/jpg/vissen.jpg is the constellation Pisces (two fishes), not the Southern Fish.

Search term Piscis Austrinus constellation Fomalhaut star atlas Hevelius / Urania's Mirror
Save as img/jpg/b14-5.jpg and replace this placeholder with a figure.

Stellarium screenshots: the Sun at the turning points and Aquarius at midnight (Z1–Z5, NY1)

Z1Spring equinox: the Sun in the head of Taurusscreenshot missing
Date
12 April 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian)
Time
sunrise (Sun at −0.27°); atmosphere and landscape off, constellation art on
View direction
east (azimuth 90°), field of view approx. 60°
Expected in the image
  • Sun at ecliptic longitude 0°
  • Pleiades (Alcyone) 3.3° west of the Sun, Aldebaran 6.4° east
Test The Sun stands between the Pleiades and the eye of the Bull, “between the horns”.
Save file as img/stellarium/Z1.jpg
Z1 – Spring equinox: the Sun in the head of Taurus. The Sun stands between the Pleiades and the eye of the Bull, “between the horns”.
Z2Summer solstice: the Sun at the heart of Leoscreenshot missing
Date
15 July 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
sunrise; atmosphere and landscape off, figures on
View direction
east-northeast (azimuth 62°), field of view approx. 60°
Expected in the image
  • Sun at longitude 90°
  • Regulus 3.2° west of the Sun
Test Solstice: the Sun in Leo; two days later Sirius returns (new year, 17 July).
Save file as img/stellarium/Z2.jpg
Z2 – Summer solstice: the Sun at the heart of Leo. Solstice: the Sun in Leo; two days later Sirius returns (new year, 17 July).
Z3Autumn equinox: the Sun on the head of Scorpiusscreenshot missing
Date
13 October 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
sunrise; atmosphere and landscape off, figures on
View direction
east (azimuth 90°), field of view approx. 60°
Expected in the image
  • Sun at longitude 180°
  • Acrab (β Sco) 0.2° from the Sun, Antares 6.4° east
Test The Sun exactly on the head of Scorpius.
Save file as img/stellarium/Z3.jpg
Z3 – Autumn equinox: the Sun on the head of Scorpius. The Sun exactly on the head of Scorpius.
Z4Winter solstice: the Sun in Aquariusscreenshot missing
Date
10 January 2579 BC (year −2578)
Time
sunrise; atmosphere and landscape off, figures on
View direction
east-southeast (azimuth 117°), field of view approx. 70°
Expected in the image
  • Sun at longitude 270°
  • Sadalmelik 0.1° (11° above the ecliptic), Fomalhaut at the same longitude, 20° below
Test The Sun at the longitude of Sadalmelik and Fomalhaut.
Save file as img/stellarium/Z4.jpg
Z4 – Winter solstice: the Sun in Aquarius. The Sun at the longitude of Sadalmelik and Fomalhaut.
Z5Aquarius rises with the setting Sun (summer solstice)screenshot missing
Date
15 July 2580 BC (year −2579)
Time
sunset (Sun at −0.27°), approx. 19:01
View direction
east-southeast (azimuth 109°), and west for the Sun (field of view approx. 70°)
Expected in the image
  • Sadalmelik (Aquarius) at 6.8°, azimuth 109°
  • Regulus at −3.4°: just set with the Sun
Test On the evening of the summer solstice Aquarius rises while the Sun sets in Leo; at new year, two days later, Sadalmelik already stands 8.4° high at sunset.
Save file as img/stellarium/Z5.jpg
Z5 – Aquarius rises with the setting Sun (summer solstice). On the evening of the summer solstice Aquarius rises while the Sun sets in Leo; at new year, two days later, Sadalmelik already stands 8.4° high at sunset.Note: here Sadalmelik also rises directly above the causeway, at azimuth 105°.
Check screens for Z1–Z5: 2000 years earlier (-V) and later (-L)

An alignment only counts as evidence if it disappears when you shift the time. Set up the same image in Stellarium (same location, same solar altitude or the same star on the meridian), but change only the year. Save as img/stellarium/<ID>-V.jpg and <ID>-L.jpg.

Z1-VSpring equinox – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
27 April 4580 BC (year −4579)
Time
sunrise, same settings
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • the Sun on the Gemini/Taurus boundary, 8° before Elnath (horn of the Bull)
Test Different stars near the Sun.
Save file as img/stellarium/Z1-V.jpg
Z1-V – Spring equinox – 2000 years earlier. Different stars near the Sun.
Z1-LSpring equinox – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
27 March 580 BC (year −579)
Time
sunrise, same settings
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • the Sun near Hamal in Aries (1.8°)
Test Different stars near the Sun.
Save file as img/stellarium/Z1-L.jpg
Z1-L – Spring equinox – 2000 years later. Different stars near the Sun.
Z2-VSummer solstice – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
30 July 4580 BC
Time
sunrise, same settings
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • the Sun at the rear of Leo, 8.5° before Denebola
Test Different stars near the Sun.
Save file as img/stellarium/Z2-V.jpg
Z2-V – Summer solstice – 2000 years earlier. Different stars near the Sun.
Z2-LSummer solstice – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
30 June 580 BC
Time
sunrise, same settings
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • the Sun in Cancer, 12° past Pollux
Test Different stars near the Sun.
Save file as img/stellarium/Z2-L.jpg
Z2-L – Summer solstice – 2000 years later. Different stars near the Sun.
Z3-VAutumn equinox – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
26 October 4580 BC
Time
sunrise, same settings
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • the Sun in Virgo/Libra, 21° before Antares
Test Different stars near the Sun.
Save file as img/stellarium/Z3-V.jpg
Z3-V – Autumn equinox – 2000 years earlier. Different stars near the Sun.
Z3-LAutumn equinox – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
30 September 580 BC
Time
sunrise, same settings
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • the Sun in Libra, 9° before Zubenelgenubi
Test Different stars near the Sun.
Save file as img/stellarium/Z3-L.jpg
Z3-L – Autumn equinox – 2000 years later. Different stars near the Sun.
Z4-VWinter solstice – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
24 January 4579 BC
Time
sunrise, same settings
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • the Sun near Scheat and Markab (Pegasus), far above the ecliptic
Test Different stars near the Sun.
Save file as img/stellarium/Z4-V.jpg
Z4-V – Winter solstice – 2000 years earlier. Different stars near the Sun.
Z4-LWinter solstice – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
27 December 580 BC
Time
sunrise, same settings
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • the Sun in Capricornus, 18° before Deneb Algedi
Test Different stars near the Sun.
Save file as img/stellarium/Z4-L.jpg
Z4-L – Winter solstice – 2000 years later. Different stars near the Sun.
Z5-VAquarius at sunset on the summer solstice – 2000 years earlierscreenshot missing
Date
30 July 4580 BC, sunset
Time
sunset (Sun at −0.27°), same settings
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • Sadalmelik already 30.0° high
Test Different stars near the Sun.
Save file as img/stellarium/Z5-V.jpg
Z5-V – Aquarius at sunset on the summer solstice – 2000 years earlier. Different stars near the Sun.
Z5-LAquarius at sunset on the summer solstice – 2000 years laterscreenshot missing
Date
30 June 580 BC, sunset
Time
sunset (Sun at −0.27°), same settings
View direction
same as the main screen
Expected in the image
  • Sadalmelik still below the horizon (−14.8°)
Test Different stars near the Sun.
Save file as img/stellarium/Z5-L.jpg
Z5-L – Aquarius at sunset on the summer solstice – 2000 years later. Different stars near the Sun.
15 July, midnight: Aquarius on the meridian (NY1)

The night of the summer solstice, two nights before new year (17 July). At sunset Sadalmelik rises (Z5); at midnight it stands in the south. Own calculation (Vondrák): Sadalmelik 47.06°, Fomalhaut 15.60°, Kochab 37.39° (azimuth 7.8°), Dubhe 14.53°.

NY1 southSadalmelik and Fomalhaut on the meridianscreenshot missing
Date
15 July 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian), summer solstice, two nights before new year
Time
23:53 local mean time (Stellarium) = approx. 23:58 apparent solar time; Sun at −36.0°, azimuth 359.5°
View direction
south (field of view c. 121°)
Expected in the image
  • Sadalmelik (Aquarius) on the meridian: azimuth 180.4°, altitude 47.0°
  • Fomalhaut (Southern Fish) directly below it at 15.6°
  • On the left Pisces, Field (Som.) and Aries; on the right Capricornus and Sagittarius, low in the southwest Scorpius
Test Do Sadalmelik and Fomalhaut stand together in the south at midnight on the solstice, and how high is Sadalmelik relative to the King’s Chamber southern shaft (45°14′)?
Save file as img/stellarium/ny1-15-7-2580bc-0u-s-sadalmelik-fomalhaut.jpg
NY1 south – Sadalmelik and Fomalhaut on the meridian. Midnight on the summer solstice: Aquarius stands in the south, with Sadalmelik on the meridian (azimuth 180°24′, altitude 47°02′; ecliptic longitude 270°06′, the winter point) and Fomalhaut, the star of the Southern Fish, below it at approx. 15.6°. The Sun stands at −36° due north. Stellarium shows 23:53 local mean time; because the Sun stands at azimuth 359.5°, it is approx. 23:58 in apparent solar time, so practically midnight. Sadalmelik stands 1.8° above the King’s Chamber southern shaft.
NY1 northThe northern sky: Thigh of the Bull and Falconscreenshot missing
Date
15 July 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian), summer solstice, two nights before new year
Time
23:53 local mean time (Stellarium) = approx. 23:58 apparent solar time; Sun at −36.0°, azimuth 359.5°
View direction
north (field of view c. 121°)
Expected in the image
  • The Thigh of the Bull (Great Bear) low above the north point, with Dubhe at approx. 14.5° (azimuth 12°)
  • The Falcon (Little Bear) above it: Kochab at approx. 37.4° (azimuth 8°), Pherkad at 39.1°
  • The Guardian (Arcturus) on the left, the Goat (Capella) on the right, low in the northeast
Test Which northern stars stand at midnight on the solstice at the altitude of the northern shafts (31°33′ and 37°28′)?
Save file as img/stellarium/ny1-15-7-2580bc-0u-n-dubhe.jpg
NY1 north – The northern sky: Thigh of the Bull and Falcon. The same midnight looking north: the Thigh of the Bull lies low above the north point (Dubhe approx. 14.5°), the Falcon stands above it. Kochab stands at approx. 37.4° (azimuth 8°), the altitude of the Queen’s Chamber northern shaft, but not on the meridian. On the left the Guardian, on the right, low, the Goat (Capella).

Stellarium screenshots: the four turning points in the east with the Egyptian figures (PT3)

The two solstices and the two equinoxes, each time looking east shortly before sunrise, with the Egyptian figures switched on. These are the same moments as Z1–Z4, but with a wider view, so that the figures around the Sun and the sky above them can be seen.

PT3 springSpring equinox: the Sun in Taurusscreenshot missing
Date
11 April 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian)
Time
05:40 local time, Sun at −5.8° (azimuth 87°)
View direction
east (field of view approx. 143°)
Expected in the image
  • The Sun (longitude 359°) just below the horizon, in Taurus, which continues below the horizon
  • Above it Aries, Pisces and the Field (Som.), on the right Aquarius
  • On the left the Baboon, the Falcon and the Thigh of the Bull
Test Does the Sun stand in Taurus at the spring equinox, with Aries above it (14.2, Z1)?
Save file as img/stellarium/pt3-spring.jpg
PT3 spring – Spring equinox: the Sun in Taurus. Spring equinox: the Sun stands just below the horizon in the east (azimuth 87°), in Taurus. Above it stand Aries, Pisces and the Field (Som.); on the right Aquarius and on the left the Falcon and the Thigh of the Bull. In the table of 14.2 Z1 is on 12 April.
PT3 summerSummer solstice: the Sun near Leoscreenshot missing
Date
15 July 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian)
Time
04:39 local time, Sun at −3.0° (azimuth 60°)
View direction
east to south (field of view c. 143°)
Expected in the image
  • The Sun (longitude 90°) just below the horizon in the east-northeast, near Leo with Berenice
  • Hathor Cow, Cancer and Goddess Satis above the eastern horizon
  • King Osiris (Orion) in the southeast, Taurus and Aries above the south
Test Does the Sun stand near Leo at the summer solstice, while Orion and the Hathor Cow have already risen (14.2, Z2)?
Save file as img/stellarium/pt3-summer.jpg
PT3 summer – Summer solstice: the Sun near Leo. Summer solstice: the Sun stands below the horizon in the east-northeast (azimuth 60°), near Leo with Berenice. Hathor Cow, Cancer, Goddess Satis and Osiris (Orion) have already risen; two days later Sirius returns (new year).
PT3 autumnAutumn equinox: the Sun on the head of Scorpiusscreenshot missing
Date
15 October 2580 BC (year −2579, Julian)
Time
05:45 local time, Sun at −3.2° (azimuth 89°)
View direction
east to south (field of view c. 143°)
Expected in the image
  • The Sun (longitude 182°) just below the horizon, on the head of Scorpius
  • Libra, Virgo and the Beast above the horizon, Leo high
  • Mother Goddess Isis, Goddess Anuket and Min-Pan on the right, with the Milky Way behind them
Test Does the Sun stand on the head of Scorpius at the autumn equinox, with Isis and the Milky Way on the right (14.2, Z3)?
Save file as img/stellarium/pt3-autumn.jpg
PT3 autumn – Autumn equinox: the Sun on the head of Scorpius. Autumn equinox: the Sun stands just below the horizon in the east (azimuth 89°), on the head of Scorpius. Above it Libra and Virgo; on the right Mother Goddess Isis, Goddess Anuket and Min-Pan with the Milky Way behind them. In the table of 14.2 Z3 is on 13 October.
PT3 winterWinter solstice: the Sun in Aquariusscreenshot missing
Date
10 January 2579 BC (year −2578, Julian)
Time
06:55 local time, Sun at −2.7° (azimuth 116°)
View direction
east to southeast (field of view c. 143°)
Expected in the image
  • The Sun (longitude 270°) just below the horizon in the southeast, near Aquarius
  • The Field (Som.) left of the Sun, above it Capricornus and Sagittarius with the Milky Way
  • On the left the Falcon, the Guardian and the Thigh of the Bull, upper right Scorpius and Khenti Irti
Test Does the Sun stand in Aquarius at the winter solstice, below Capricornus and Sagittarius (14.2, Z4)?
Save file as img/stellarium/pt3-winter.jpg
PT3 winter – Winter solstice: the Sun in Aquarius. Winter solstice: the Sun stands just below the horizon in the southeast (azimuth 116°), in Aquarius. Above it Capricornus and Sagittarius with the Milky Way; on the left the Field (Som.), the Falcon and the Guardian, upper right Scorpius.

14.3 Reasoning backwards: from god to date

Test cardD
Claim
If we start from the attributes of the gods and look for when the sky matches them exactly, most dates come out in the 26th century BC.
Measurement and error
Seven of the eleven pairings fall between 2725 and 2335 BC; two date nothing.
Degrees of freedom
Which attribute we pair with which sky image is our choice; that is why the full table is shown below, including the pairings that do not fit.
Strongest counter-argument
Because of precession many sky images fall in the same centuries; seven hits in the same century are not independent of each other.
Check
See 12.1, 14.1 and 14.2 for the calculations.

So far we went from the sky to the myth: we looked for what stood in the sky and then checked which god fitted it. Now we go the other way round. We take an attribute or passage of a god who was important in the Old Kingdom, think of which sky image would literally match it, and calculate when that image was correct.

God and attributeSourceMatching sky imageWhen exactly is it correct?Fits Khufu?Level
Osiris: “the birth of Orion shall not be hindered”; he returns from the DuatAllen, pdf p. 97Orion’s belt at the angle of the King’s Chamber southern shaft (45°14′)2606–2447 BC (three stars), window ±0.3°: 2665–2386yesC
Isis/Sothis announces the new year and the inundationNile Scribes, pdf p. 4heliacal rising of Sirius at the summer solsticeexactly approx. 3100 BC; within 4 days 3600–2600 BCat the edge (+3.4 days)C
Sothis is the king’s sister; she leads him to the skyAllen, pdf p. 118Sirius at the angle of the Queen’s Chamber southern shaft (38°28′)2725 BC; window ±0.3°: 2815–2634just beforeC
The king goes to the imperishable stars in the northAllen, pdf p. 23the pole star Thuban at the angle of the King’s Chamber northern shaft (31°33′)2519 and 3076 BC; ±0.3°: 2572–2467yesC
Hathor: the eye on her brow “turns back the years”; sun disk between the hornsAllen, pdf p. 103spring equinox: the Sun between the Pleiades and Aldebaran, in the head of Taurus3040 BC (on Aldebaran) to 2335 BC (on the Pleiades)yesD
Sekhmet, the lioness with the sun disk, begets the king as morning starAllen, pdf p. 53summer solstice: the Sun near Regulus, the heart of Leoexactly on Regulus: 2340 BC; within 3.5°: approx. 2590–2090 BCyes (3.2°)D
Selket, the scorpion, mourns Osiris; Osiris dies when the Sun passes through the ScorpionAllen, pdf p. 451 Berio, pdf p. 25autumn equinox: the Sun on the head of Scorpiusexactly on Acrab: 2565 BC; on Antares: 3050 BCyesD
Seshat and the stretching of the cord on the Great BearBelmonte, pdf p. 1Mizar and Kochab vertically above each other through the pole2467 BC (Spence: 2478 ± 5)100 years laterC
Khnum (ram), the god in the name Khnum-Khufugeneral knowledgeHamal (Aries) high above the Sphinx on the morning of the spring equinoxaround 2580 BC 15° high; the vernal point itself only enters Aries around 1900 BCpartlyE
Horus in the horizon (Hor-em-akhet): the Sphinx looks at the rising SunDream Stela (New Kingdom)Sun at azimuth 89.5° at the equinoxevery year; dates nothing—C
Nut gives birth to the Sun at dawn; Osiris in the womb of NutAllen, pdf p. 20the Sun in the Milky Wayin 2580 BC on 10 May and 8 November, not at a turning pointundecidedE

Dates: own calculation (Vondrák precession, proper motion), see 12.1 and 14.2. Sirius at new year: 11.3. Spence: 13.2.

What stands out?

  • Seven of the eleven pairings come out between approx. 2725 and 2335 BC, around the time of Khufu. Two date nothing (the Sphinx and the Milky Way), one lies 500 years earlier (Sirius at the solstice, the period in which the calendar arose) and one is speculation (Khnum).
  • The autumn equinox is the sharpest: in 2565 BC, in the middle of Khufu’s reign, the Sun stood exactly on the head of Scorpius.
  • The pattern does not work for the northern shaft of the Queen’s Chamber: there is no god that we can pair with Kochab or Pherkad in advance (12.5).

What does the other side say? Because of precession all sky images shift together; whoever picks a century gets “fitting” stars for all turning points at once. The seven hits are therefore not seven independent proofs, but four (the shafts, the turning points, Sirius and the northern direction). Moreover, we choose which attribute belongs to which image. That is why the pairings that do not fit are shown here as well.

The shafts point to the same centuries. Orion, Sirius and Thuban fit together around 2590 BC; with all 33 stars three shafts fit best in 2504 BC (13.3). The turning points of the Sun and the images of the gods in the table lie in the same centuries.
Timeline of the pairings. Each dot is a date from the table, the light bar the window; the gold band is the reign of Khufu (approx. 2589–2566 BC). The same points appear in the interactive timeline in 15.3.

Chapter 15 Balance and timeline

All theories with their level of evidence side by side, the provisional conclusion and a timeline of all important moments.

15.1 All theories side by side

All theories from this part in one overview, each with level, error, strongest argument for and strongest argument against, and the Stellarium screenshot that supports it.

No.ClaimLevelCore of the errorStrongest forStrongest againstStellarium
T1π in the Great PyramidB−0,09% / +0,04%fits to 0.1%seked 14:11 explains everything; apex missing—
T2Golden ratio in the Great PyramidB+0,001% / +0,03%apothem/half base = φsame as T1—
T3Khafre = 3-4-5 triangleA0,03°exact 4:3no text from this period—
T4King’s Chamber 2:4:√5 (15-20-25)B< 0,3%space diagonal 25 cubitsmay be a by-product—
T5Earth scale 1 : 43,200B−0.43% to −0.67%two dimensions fitscale factor chosen afterwards; circular reasoning—
T6Khafre = VenusB−2,2% / +2,4%two dimensions within 2.4%two scales; Menkaure does not fit—
T7Menkaure = MercuryE+8.5% to +16.7%series Earth–Venus–Mercuryperimeter adjusted (385 instead of 414)—
T8Pyramids = Orion’s belt (ground plan)Cratio 9.6%, angle 4°three points with a kinkno copy; degrees of freedomphoto in 11.1
T9Sphinx and causeway as a solar calendarC1.8 and 2.5 days (at 104°); 4.2 and 5.1 days (at 105°)civil seasons on the causewaymap value 104–105°; 1 in 6 by chanceK1–K7
T10Stars of gods before sunriseDSirius: 1.4–4.4 dSirius/Isis, Orion/Osirisother gods unprovenD1–D6
T11Sunset as akhet (summer solstice)C< 1° relative to the notchAkhet-Khufu; start of the Akhet seasonnatural imageE2–E4
T12Southern shaft King’s Chamber (45°14′) = OrionCMintaka +0.14°, Alnilam −0.36°belt brackets Petrie’s angleshafts not straight and closed offSH1–SH4
T13Sirius in the Queen’s Chamber southern shaft (38°28′)C+0,47°Sirius/Isis; exact in 2725 BC145 years before the reference yearSH5
T14Alnilam date = ⅓ of the yearC< 2 dayssame night as the causeway rising (K3): Orion at 24:00, the Sun at the following dawnchance probability approx. 9%SH1, K3
T15Knowledge of precession (Leo 10,000 BC)En/aOrion minimum and Leo flatno source at allP1–P6
T16Pyramids deliberately aligned to the cardinal directionsA≤ 1.75° (6 of 6); Khufu 0.05°later temples: 4 of 144 (chance)says something about method, not about stars or shafts—
T17Sun and Sirius as building target (temple statistics)Cwinter solstice 5×, Sirius 2× chance150 independent measurementsmainly New Kingdom; summer solstice missing—
T18Three shafts filled at once (Orion, Sirius or Saiph, Thuban); tested with 33 stars chosen in advance, on and off the meridianB2608–2432 BC (±0.5°, meridian); otherwise only briefly around 3700 BC. Off the meridian all four at one moment: 2460–2388 BC (±0.3°)once in 26,000 years, at the start of Khufu’s reign; all four off the meridian also only once (±0.3°)depends on Petrie’s measurements; on the meridian the fourth shaft does not fit; off the meridian, with free choice of stars, it is common (470 stars: 50% of the years)SH1–SH7
T19Duat = invisibility (Orion 62, Sirius 73 days)DSirius 71–76 d against “some seventy days”the text names Orion and Sothis together in the Duat, in the right order70 days of embalming has not been demonstrated for the Old KingdomM1, M2, M3
T20Descending passage aimed at ThubanAin 2580 BC 2.2° offcorrect in 3409 and 2184 BCdoes not fall in Khufu’s time: a finding againstN2, N3
T21King’s Chamber northern shaft = pole star ThubanC−0.34° (2580); exact 2519 BCthe only northern alignment on the meridianThuban is faint and has no name of its own in the textsSH6, SH7, SN9
T229–11 November: Orion (belt and Saiph), Kochab and Megrez in all four shaftsCthree ≤ 0.13°; all four ≤ 0.63° (11 Nov)the only moment of the year with all four shafts filledMegrez is one of seven stars of the Great Bear; prior probability 2.4%SN7, SN10
T23Sun at the turning points near Taurus, Leo, Scorpius and AquariusDAcrab 0.2°, Sadalmelik 0.1°, Regulus 3.2°Hathor and Sekhmet with sun disk at the two starting days of the yearzodiac younger; 15% chance per pointZ1–Z4
T24From god to date: 7 of 11 pairings in 2725–2335 BCDn/aOld Kingdom texts as starting pointhits not independent (precession)—
T25Two mornings in the Milky Way (10 May and 8 November): figures of life and death; in November at the causeway; the Sokar festival (26 Khoiak) falls on 9 November (E)DSun 2–3° from the causeway line (8 Nov); Sadalmelik ≈ southern shaft (45.5° against 45°14′)the Sun stands in the Milky Way on both mornings; counterparts in north and south; November falls in the causeway weekfigures from the Stellarium sky culture; attributes from later sourcesPT4, M5
T26Festival calendar (11.6): thirteen festivals on the Julian dates of 2580 BC; at five of them (Osiris procession, Hathor, Sokar, Renenutet, Min) a matching figure stands on the meridian or at the horizonEn/a; the dates follow from new year on 17 July and months of 30 daysdates from the New Kingdom, 1400 years after Khufu; the choice of festivals and of the timewith thirteen festivals some figure always fits; the figure names come from StellariumFST1

Level A = measurable fact, B = numerical match, C = calculated coincidence, D = interpretation, E = speculation.

Convergence: does everything point to the same year?

A single coincidence says little; only when independent measurements point to the same moment does chance become unlikely. For 2580 BC (Khufu, approx. 2589–2566) the picture is as follows:

Independent indicationPoints toWidth of the window
Orion’s belt at 45°14′ (shaft)2665–2386 BC±0,3°
Orion, Sirius and Thuban together (three shafts)2608–2572 BC±0,5°
Sirius: heliacal rising (new year) within 4 days of the solstice3600–2600 BC (0 days around 3100 BC)approx. ±500 years
Four corner stars (Regulus, Antares, Fomalhaut, Aldebaran) at the seasonal points3000–2000 BCapprox. ±450 years
Causeway 104° on day 120 of the yearstrongly dependent on the orientation, not on the year—
Sun in the notch Khufu–Khafre at the summer solsticeall years (dependent on the tilt of the Earth)±2000 years

Only the first three are dating evidence; the other two are tied to the site and say nothing about the year. The overlapping window 2650–2490 BC is therefore mainly the shaft.

Independent dating from outside this researchOutcomeFits the 45° shaft?
Spence 2000: Kochab and Mizar on one line through the pole2478 ± 5 BCpartly: Alnitak 45.08° and Thuban 31.78° fit; Sirius stands 0.8° too high
Conventional chronology (king lists)Khufu approx. 2589–2566 BCyes: all three shafts within 0.5° (2608–2572 BC)
Nell & Ruggles 2014; Belmonte 2001Spence’s method not unambiguousno judgement

Finding: the king lists fall within the window of the three shafts; Spence lies about 100 years after it. The statistics are in 13.3.

Chance estimate (example). If a star culminates on a random day, it falls with probability 8 × 4 / 365 ≈ 9% within 2 days of one of eight “nice” calendar dates (T14). A causeway passage falls with probability 1 in 6 within 2.5 days of a month boundary (T9). If you combine independent chance probabilities by multiplying them, the probability of all three together is 9% × 17% × (probability of the Orion angle) — small, but only valid if the three really are independent and the search space was fixed in advance. That cannot yet be demonstrated.

How to read this overview
Levels A and B are about numbers, C about sky and horizon, D about texts and E about guesses. Whoever counts only levels A and B is left with π/φ, 3-4-5 and (partly) the Earth scale. Whoever adds the sky claims gets a coherent but unproven story around new year, Sirius, Orion and the 45° shaft.

15.2 Provisional conclusion and what is still missing

This is how far the working hypothesis “it was not chance” leads. The provisional balance:

  • Strong: the orientation to the cardinal directions (6 of 6 pyramid temples within 1.75°, against 4 of 144 later temples; 13.2), Khafre as 3-4-5, the 14:11 seked that yields both π and φ, the Sirius rising at the solstice (new year), the Great Pyramid as “horizon” (Akhet-Khufu) with the sunset at the summer solstice in the notch Khufu–Khafre, and the shafts of Orion, Sirius and the pole star Thuban, which according to Petrie’s measurements stand at their angles simultaneously only in the time of Khufu.
  • Indication: the Earth scale 1 : 43,200 (0.4–0.7%), Khafre = Venus, the civil season boundaries on the causeway passages.
  • Weak or unlikely: the summer solstice as building direction (less often than chance in 150 temple axes; 13.2), Menkaure = Mercury, the ground plan as a copy of Orion (9.6% deviation), the northern shaft of the Queen’s Chamber (no star on the meridian) and knowledge of precession.
  • Broad test (12.1 and 13.3): of 33 stars chosen in advance (all stars named by researchers or by this book), three stand on the shaft angles at the same time only in 2608–2432 BC, apart from a short window around 3700 BC; on 11–15 November 2580 BC every shaft even has a star at midnight. If we also count the stars that reach the altitude of a shaft off the meridian (14 instead of only Thuban for the King’s Chamber northern shaft, and Mizar for both northern shafts), then all four are filled at the same moment at ±0.3° only once in the cycle: 2460–2388 BC, with Orion, Kochab and the Great Bear. With a free choice of stars that is common; so it only says something about the list chosen in advance.
  • Statistical finding (13.3): with Petrie’s angles, Orion, Sirius and Thuban stand within 0.5° of their shaft at the same time only once in 26,000 years: 2608–2572 BC, with the smallest deviation in 2584 BC. The count of midnights (12.3) peaks later (approx. 2340 BC) and does not date the construction.
  • Myths at the turning points (14.2–14.3): in Khufu’s time the Sun stood in Taurus in spring, near the heart of Leo at the summer solstice and exactly on the head of Scorpius in autumn; the gods with a sun disk (Hathor, Sekhmet) belong to the two starting days of the year.
  • Two mornings in the Milky Way (11.5): on 10 May and 8 November 2580 BC the Sun stands in the Milky Way, with the figures of life in May (Taurus, Aries, Pisces, Aquarius) and those of death, the Nile and Horus in November (Scorpius, Isis, Falcon); in November the Sun rises at the causeway. A coherence, not proof.
  • Festival calendar (11.6): the known festivals of the civil calendar are placed on the Julian dates of 2580 BC; for five festivals (Osiris procession, Hathor, Sokar, Renenutet, Min) we show the night sky. The days come from the New Kingdom and are a projection (level E).
  • Myths (14.1): Orion and Sothis are invisible for 62 and 73 days (“surrounded by the Duat”), in the order of the text; in Khufu’s time the descending passage does not point at Thuban (13.2b).
  • Two checks from outside: Belmonte’s temple statistics confirm sun, Sirius and the cardinal directions as Egyptian building targets; Spence’s dating (2478 BC) falls within the shaft window of the belt.
  • Most important missing link: a text or drawing from the Fourth Dynasty that explicitly names sun, stars or measures as a design rule.

What would refute the hypothesis?

  • K3/K5 fall within 2.5 days of the month boundaries only if the causeway angle lies between 102.2° and 104.0°; at the map value of 105° the difference is 4–5 days.
  • A Stellarium check in which the Sun does not sink into the notch Khufu–Khafre at the summer solstice of 2580 BC (E3).
  • A new measurement of the shafts over their full length that deviates far from Petrie: a King’s Chamber southern shaft of 44.0° or 46.5° rules out the belt, a northern shaft of 32.5° the pole star.
  • Another structure from a different period where the same “special” points fit just as well (the look-elsewhere effect).

15.3 Timeline: all important moments side by side

Slide through time, or click on a line. Each line is a moment from this book; the colour shows what kind of moment it is. The gold band is the reign of Khufu. With the buttons you choose the range: everything, the Old Kingdom or the centuries around the construction.

HistorySkyStructureTextMyth and turning pointsThis research

go to the chapter
All 52 moments as a list
  1. 10720 BC Orion at its lowest point: Orion’s belt rises no higher than 9.2° on the meridian.
  2. 10000 BC End of the Ice Age: The Green Sahara emerges: lakes, savanna and cattle where there is now desert.
  3. 9001 BC Regulus in the east at the summer solstice: According to Erydir, Regulus rises at azimuth 90°; tested and adjusted in 13.1.
  4. 5300 BC The Sahara dries out: People and cattle move to the Nile valley.
  5. 5000 BC Farming along the Nile: Wheat, barley, sheep and goats; stone circles at Nabta Playa.
  6. 3409 BC Descending passage on Thuban (1): Thuban at the lower passage at 26.5°, the slope of the descending passage.
  7. 3100 BC Unification of Egypt: Narmer and the 1st Dynasty; Horus becomes the god of kingship.
  8. 3100 BC Sirius rises on the longest day: The heliacal rising of Sirius falls exactly on the summer solstice: the calendar arises.
  9. 3076 BC Thuban at the King’s Chamber northern angle (1): Thuban reaches 31°33′ while turning towards the pole.
  10. 3050 BC Autumn: Sun on the heart of Scorpius: At the autumn equinox the Sun stands on Antares.
  11. 3040 BC Spring: Sun on the eye of Taurus: At the spring equinox the Sun stands on Aldebaran: the start of the Sun “in the head of the Bull”.
  12. 2800 BC Thuban almost on the pole: The faint star Thuban stands less than 0.1° from the celestial pole.
  13. 2725 BC Sirius at the Queen’s Chamber southern angle: Sirius reaches 38°28′ at its meridian passage.
  14. 2670 BC Step Pyramid of Djoser: The first large stone pyramid, Saqqara.
  15. 2613 BC Sneferu: start of the 4th Dynasty: Pyramids at Meidum and Dahshur; the training ground for Giza.
  16. 2608 BC Three shafts at their angle at once (start): Orion, Sirius and Thuban all three within 0.5° of Petrie’s angles: 2608–2572 BC.
  17. 2606 BC Mintaka at the King’s Chamber southern angle: The first star of the belt reaches 45°14′.
  18. 2589 BC Khufu becomes king: Reign approx. 2589–2566 BC; construction of the Great Pyramid.
  19. 2584 BC Smallest deviation of the three shafts: The three datable shafts fit best together in 2584 BC.
  20. 2580 BC Reference year 2580 BC: Summer solstice on 15 July: the Sun sinks into the notch of Akhet-Khufu. New year on 17 July: Sirius returns. On 11–15 November every shaft has a star at midnight.
  21. 2565 BC Autumn: Sun on the head of Scorpius: At the autumn equinox the Sun stands exactly on Acrab.
  22. 2558 BC Khafre and the Sphinx: Second pyramid; according to the prevailing view Khafre gives the Sphinx his face.
  23. 2532 BC Menkaure: Third pyramid; statue groups with Hathor and the sun disk.
  24. 3740 BC Three shafts filled (briefly): Bellatrix, the belt (in the Queen’s Chamber southern shaft) and Edasich: 3740–3660 BC.
  25. 2486 BC Saiph at the Queen’s Chamber southern angle: Orion’s knee reaches 38°28′.
  26. 2432 BC End of the period with three filled shafts: With all 33 stars: three shafts filled at once from 2608 to 2432 BC.
  27. 2504 BC Best three shafts with all 33 stars: On the meridian Alnilam, Saiph and Thuban all three stand within 0.09° of their shaft angle.
  28. 2546 BC All four shafts at once off the meridian (start, ±0.5°): From 2546 to 2264 BC the belt, Saiph, Kochab and the Great Bear stand at the four angles at one moment (azimuth within 25°).
  29. 2460 BC All four shafts at once (±0.3°, off the meridian): The only time in 26,000 years that the 33 stars chosen in advance fill all four shafts at one moment: 2460–2388 BC.
  30. 2519 BC Thuban at the King’s Chamber northern angle (2): The pole star of that time reaches 31°33′ while turning away from the pole.
  31. 2508 BC Alnilam at the King’s Chamber southern angle: The middle star of the belt reaches 45°14′.
  32. 2478 BC Spence’s dating: Laying out the Great Pyramid with Mizar and Kochab: 2478 ± 5 BC.
  33. 2467 BC Mizar and Kochab vertically above each other: The plumb line through the pole (N1).
  34. 2447 BC Alnitak at the King’s Chamber southern angle: The last star of the belt reaches 45°14′.
  35. 2350 BC Pyramid Texts of Unas: The oldest preserved religious texts, with Orion, Sothis and the imperishable stars.
  36. 2340 BC Summer: Sun on the heart of Leo: At the summer solstice the Sun stands exactly on Regulus.
  37. 2335 BC Spring: Sun on the Pleiades: End of the Sun “in the head of the Bull” at the spring equinox.
  38. 2184 BC Descending passage on Thuban (2): Thuban again at 26.5° at the lower passage.
  39. 1900 BC Vernal point in Aries: The vernal point shifts from Taurus to Aries.
  40. 1819 BC Kochab at the Queen’s Chamber northern angle: Kochab reaches 37°28′, more than 750 years after the construction.
  41. 1470 BC Amduat and the ceiling of Senenmut: The night journey of the Sun and the star calendar with decans and northern figures.
  42. 1401 BC Dream Stela of Thutmose IV: The Sphinx is called Hor-em-akhet, “Horus in the horizon”.
  43. 450 BC Herodotus in Egypt: He describes the construction of the pyramids, 2000 years later.
  44. 240 BC Eratosthenes measures the Earth: The first known measurement of the Earth’s circumference.
  45. 238 BC Decree of Canopus: The first known leap-day rule.
  46. 130 BC Hipparchus discovers precession: The slow turning of the Earth’s axis is described for the first time.
  47. 50 BC Zodiac of Dendera: Egyptian and Mesopotamian sky figures together, with the northern figures in the centre.
  48. AD 70 Vernal point in Pisces: The vernal point shifts from Aries to Pisces.
  49. AD 1311 No longer the tallest building: Lincoln Cathedral becomes taller than the Great Pyramid.
  50. AD 1883 Petrie measures Giza: Petrie measures the shaft angles: 45°14′, 31°33′, 38°28′ and 37°28′.
  51. AD 1993 The robot Upuaut: Gantenbrink measures the shafts and finds the small stone door.
  52. AD 2000 Spence in Nature: The north alignment of the pyramids as a dating method.
  53. AD 2013 Papyri of Merer: The logbook of a boat crew that brought limestone to Giza.
  54. AD 2017 Void above the Grand Gallery: Discovered with cosmic rays (muons).
  55. AD 2026 Now: Orion’s belt culminates at approx. 59°, far above the shaft; Polaris is the pole star.

Appendix Bibliography

The sources are available as pdf in the folder /pdf/; most also have a link to the online version. Sources that are not (yet) available as pdf are listed at the bottom with only an online link. Each name is a clickable link to the file. References in the text open the file directly at the relevant page (pdf page number, not the page number of the book).

  1. Allen, J.P. (2005). The Ancient Egyptian Pyramid Texts. Writings from the Ancient World 23. Atlanta: Society of Biblical Literature. Translation with introduction; 483 pp.
  2. Ancient Society. Ancient Egyptian Calendar: 12 Months, 3 Seasons & 365 Days. ancientsociety.com (web page, printed 20-09-2026).
  3. Bartlett, C. (2014). The Design of the Great Pyramid of Khufu. Nexus Network Journal 16(2): 299–311. doi:10.1007/s00004-014-0193-9.
    design_of_great_pyramid.pdfdoi Used in chapter 2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
  4. Belmonte, J.A., Fekri, M., Abdel-Hadi, Y.A., Shaltout, M. & González García, A.C. (2010). On the Orientation of Ancient Egyptian Temples: (5) Testing the Theory in Middle Egypt and Sudan. Journal for the History of Astronomy 41(1): 65–93.
  5. Berio, A. (2014). The Celestial River: Identifying the Ancient Egyptian Constellations. Sino-Platonic Papers 253. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania.
  6. Book of Caverns. Wikipedia (English), article on the Egyptian netherworld book.
  7. Budge, E.A. Wallis (1905). The Book of Gates, with the Short Form of the Book Am-Tuat. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co. (sacred-texts.com).
  8. Calendars in Ancient Egypt. Middle East and North Africa – Facts and Details (africame.factsanddetails.com, art. 1039; printed 20-09-2026).
    calenders_in_ancient_egypt.pdfUsed in chapter 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 11
  9. Decan. Wikipedia (English), article on the 36 Egyptian decans.
    decan.pdf Wikipedia Used in chapter 2, 14
  10. Erydir (2025). The Lion Watches the Lion: Regulus Rising at the Giza Sphinx in 9500–9000 BCE. Short speculative study (Stellarium/NASA Horizons).
  11. Furlong, D. Sekeds and the Geometry of the Great Pyramid. davidfurlong.co.uk (web page).
  12. Hall, M.P. (1928). The Secret Teachings of All Ages. Book (large file, approx. 730 MB).
    the_secret_teachings_of_all_ages.pdfBackground source (not cited in the text)
  13. Hornung, E. & Abt, T. (2007). The Egyptian Amduat: The Book of the Hidden Chamber (trans. D. Warburton; sample). Zürich: Living Human Heritage Publications.
    amduat_leseprobe.pdfUsed in chapter 5
  14. Jelitto, H. (2015). Planetary Correlation of the Giza Pyramids – P4 Program Description. Hamburg, 2nd edition; 154 pp.
  15. Journeys of the Pyramid Builders. Archaeology Magazine, July/August 2022 (web page, printed 20-09-2026).
  16. Nile Scribes (20 December 2017). Celebrating the Seasons: the Ancient Egyptian Calendar. nilescribes.org (web page).
  17. Orion correlation theory. Wikipedia (English). Concerns a fringe theory within Egyptology.
  18. Piramide van Chefren (Pyramid of Khafre). Wikipedia (Dutch), oldid 70846351.
  19. Piramide van Cheops (Pyramid of Khufu). Wikipedia (Dutch), oldid 71117370.
  20. Piramide van Menkaoera (Pyramid of Menkaure). Wikipedia (Dutch), oldid 70846404.
  21. Ramirez, M.R. (2018). The Great Pyramid of Giza, Pi, and the Golden Ratio. Galena Park High School (article, last revised 19-11-2018).
  22. Shaltout, M. & Belmonte, J.A. (2005). On the Orientation of Ancient Egyptian Temples: (1) Upper Egypt and Lower Nubia. Journal for the History of Astronomy 36(3): 273–298.
    arqueoastronomia.pdf doi Used in chapter 4, 13, 14
  23. Spence, K. (2000). Ancient Egyptian chronology and the astronomical orientation of pyramids. Nature 408: 320–324.
    spence.pdf doi Used in chapter 12, 13
  24. The Heliacal Rising of Sirius (anonymous article, translation). Contains esoteric as well as historical passages.
  25. Vodolazhskaya, L.N., Usachuk, A.N. & Nevsky, M.Yu. (2015). Marks of Heliacal Rising of Sirius on the Sundial of the Bronze Age. Archaeoastronomy and Ancient Technologies 3(2): 23–42.

Sources without pdf: online

These sources are not in /pdf/. The link opens the online version (doi, web page or Internet Archive). Check the rights before adding a pdf to the folder.

  • Alison, J. Shaft Geometry and Astronomical Alignments (summary of Gantenbrink’s Upuaut measurements).
    web page Used in 12.2
  • Bauval, R. & Gilbert, A. (1994). The Orion Mystery. London: Heinemann.
  • Belmonte, J.A. (2001). On the Orientation of Old Kingdom Egyptian Pyramids. Journal for the History of Astronomy 32 (Archaeoastronomy 26): S1–S20.
    doi Used in 13.2
  • Berlin Papyrus 6619. Wikipedia (English), mathematical papyrus from the Middle Kingdom.
    Wikipedia Used in 10.2
  • Ikhemu-sek and The Indestructibles. Wikipedia (English).
  • Krupp, E.C. (1994). Echoes of the Ancient Skies. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
  • Lehner, M. (1997). The Complete Pyramids. London: Thames & Hudson.
    Internet Archive Used in 7, 8
  • Max-Planck-Institut für Wissenschaftsgeschichte (2022). Astronomical Orientation of the Pyramids and Stellar Alignments. Preprint 511.
  • Nemes, G.W. (2020). The mythological importance of the constellation Msḫtjw in mortuary representations until the end of the New Kingdom. ENiM 13: 1–61.
  • Neugebauer, O. & Parker, R.A. (1960). Egyptian Astronomical Texts, vol. 1. Providence: Brown University Press.
    Internet Archive Used in 2, 8
  • Petrie, W.M.F. (1883). The Pyramids and Temples of Gizeh. London: Field & Tuer.
    full text Used in 7, 8
  • Reret. All Skies Encyclopaedia (exopla.net).
  • Star shaft and Upuaut Project. Wikipedia (English).
  • Vondrák, J., Capitaine, N. & Wallace, P. (2011). New precession expressions, valid for long time intervals. Astronomy & Astrophysics 534: A22.

Facts without a pdf reference come from general knowledge and are marked as such (general knowledge).

Afterword Inspiration

This research began with the questions of two writers. In this book we test their ideas as strictly as we can, and not everything survives. But without them this search would never have started. Thanks to:

Graham Hancock

British journalist and writer, born in 1950 in Edinburgh

Hancock worked as a correspondent for, among others, The Economist and became world-famous with Fingerprints of the Gods (1995), in which he argues that a forgotten civilisation from the last Ice Age passed on its knowledge. Together with Robert Bauval he wrote Keeper of Genesis (1996) on the Sphinx, Leo and precession; later came, among others, Magicians of the Gods (2015) and America Before (2019), and the Netflix series Ancient Apocalypse (2022, 2024). Egyptologists and archaeologists mostly disagree with his conclusions, but his questions have made many people look, including us (13.1).

YouTube channel Official website

Robert Bauval

Construction engineer and writer, born in 1948 in Alexandria (Egypt)

Bauval grew up in Egypt and worked as an engineer in the Middle East and Africa. In 1989 he published the Orion correlation theory: the three pyramids of Giza as the three stars of Orion’s belt. In The Orion Mystery (1994, with Adrian Gilbert) he also linked the shafts of the Great Pyramid to Orion, Sirius, Thuban and Kochab. That link is the starting point of chapter 12; we test his ground-plan idea in 11.1. Later he wrote, among others, Keeper of Genesis (with Graham Hancock) and Black Genesis (2011, with Thomas Brophy).

YouTube channel Official website

Their official websites have no portrait photo; that is why we link to their YouTube channels, where they speak for themselves.

Comments What do you think?

An addition, a question or found a mistake? Leave a comment below. Dutch and English readers see the same comments.

Comments

Loading comments…

Post a comment

Your email address is never shown. Only your name appears with your comment; only the site owner sees the email address, for example to reply to you personally.

Your comment appears immediately on both the Dutch and the English page, with only your name. Inappropriate comments will be removed. To prevent abuse we only store an untraceable code of your IP address.